Pentax Camcorder K20D User Manual

Thank you for purchasing this PENTAX u Digital Camera. Please read  
this manual before using the camera in order to get the most out of all the  
features and functions. Keep this manual safe, as it can be a valuable tool in  
helping you to understand all the camera capabilities.  
Lenses you can use  
In general, lenses that can be used with this camera are DA, D FA and FA J lenses and  
lenses that have an Aperture s(Auto) position.  
To use any other lens or accessory, see p.50 and p.251.  
Regarding copyrights  
Images taken using the u that are for anything other than personal enjoyment  
cannot be used without permission according to the rights as specified in the Copyright  
Act. Please take care, as there are even cases where limitations are placed on taking  
pictures even for personal enjoyment during demonstrations, performances or of items  
on display. Images taken with the purpose of obtaining copyrights also cannot be used  
outside the scope of use of the copyright as laid out in the Copyright Act, and care  
should be taken here also.  
Regarding trademarks  
PENTAX and smc PENTAX are trademarks of PENTAX Corporation.  
SD logo and SDHC logo are trademarks.  
This product includes DNG technology under license by Adobe Systems Incorporated.  
The DNG logo is either a registered trademark or trademark of Adobe Systems  
Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.  
All other brands or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their  
respective companies.  
To users of this camera  
• There is a possibility that recorded data may be erased or that the camera may not  
function correctly when used in surroundings such as installations generating strong  
electromagnetic radiation or magnetic fields.  
• The liquid crystal panel used in the monitor is manufactured using extremely high  
precision technology. Although the level of functioning pixels is 99.99% or better, you  
should be aware that 0.01% or fewer of the pixels may not illuminate or may illuminate  
when they should not. However, this has no effect on the recorded image.  
This product supports PRINT Image Matching III. PRINT Image Matching enabled  
digital still cameras, printers and software help photographers to produce images more  
faithful to their intentions. Some functions are not available on printers that are not  
PRINT Image Matching III compliant.  
Copyright 2001 Seiko Epson Corporation. All Rights Reserved.  
PRINT Image Matching is a trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation.  
The PRINT Image Matching logo is a trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation.  
Regarding PictBridge  
PictBridge allows the user to connect the printer and digital camera directly, using the  
unified standard for the direct printout of images. You can print images directly from the  
camera through a few simple operations.  
• There is a possibility that the illustrations and the display screen of the monitor in this  
manual are different from the actual product.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
Caution  
• Do not short the battery or dispose of the battery in fire. Do not disassemble  
the battery. The battery could explode or catch fire.  
• Remove the battery from the camera immediately if they become hot or  
begin to smoke. Be careful not to burn yourself during removal.  
• Some portions of the camera heat up during use. There is the risk of low  
temperature burns when holding such portions for long periods.  
• Do not place your finger over or cover the flash with clothing when  
discharging the flash. Fingers or clothing may be burned.  
• Depending on a user's physical condition, some users may experience  
itching, break out in a rash or suffer from eczema. If an abnormality occurs,  
immediately discontinue using the camera and seek medical attention.  
PRECAUTIONS FOR BATTERY USAGE  
• Only use the specified battery with this camera. Use of other batteries can  
cause a fire or explosion.  
• Keep wires, hairpins, and other metal objects away from the + and – contacts  
of the battery. When storing a battery removed from the camera, be sure to  
attach the included protective cap to avoid shorting.  
• Do not disassemble the battery. Disassembling the battery can cause  
explosion or leakage.  
• If any leakage from the battery should come in contact with your eyes, do not  
rub them. Flush your eyes with clean water and get medical attention  
immediately.  
• If any leakage from the battery should come in contact with skin or clothes,  
wash the affected areas thoroughly with water.  
• Do not disassemble or short circuit the battery case. Do not dispose of the  
battery in a fire or leave the battery in a place with high temperatures. Doing  
so may cause the battery to become hot, catch fire or explode.  
• Be sure to charge the battery with the specified battery charger.  
• Remove the battery from the camera immediately if it becomes hot or begins  
to smoke. Be careful not to burn yourself during removal.  
• Storing the battery fully charged may decrease the battery performance.  
Avoid storing in high temperatures.  
If the battery is left inserted and the camera is not used for a long time, the  
battery will over-discharge and shorten the battery's usage span.  
• Charging the battery a day before use or on the day of use is recommended.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
PRECAUTIONS FOR BATTERY CHARGER  
USAGE  
• Only use the battery charger D-BC50 supplied with the camera. Do not use  
the product at a voltage other than the specified voltage. Use with a power  
source or voltage other than that designed can cause a fire or electrical  
shock. The specified voltage is 100 - 240V AC.  
• Do not use the battery charger to charge batteries other than rechargeable  
lithium-ion battery D-LI50. This can cause explosion or a fire or breakdown  
of the battery charger.  
• Do not disassemble or modify the product. This can cause a fire or electrical  
shock.  
• If the generation of smoke or strange odor from the product or other  
abnormality occurs, immediately discontinue using and consult a PENTAX  
Service Center. Continued use could cause a fire or electric shock.  
• If water should happen to get inside the product, consult a PENTAX Service  
Center. Continuing to use the product can cause a fire or electrical shock.  
• If thunderstorm should be present during use of the battery charger, unplug  
the power cord and discontinue use. Continuing to use the product can  
cause damage to the equipment, fire or electrical shock.  
• Wipe off the plug of the power cord if it should become covered with dust.  
This can cause a fire.  
• To reduce the risk of hazards, use only CSA/UL Certified power supply cord  
set, cord is Type SPT-2 or heavier, minimum NO.18 AWG copper, one end  
with a molded-on male attachment plug cap (with a specified NEMA  
configuration), and the other is provided with a molded-on female connector  
body (with a specified IEC nonindustrial type configuration) or the equivalent.  
• The AC plug cord supplied with the camera is for exclusive use with the  
battery charger D-BC50. Do not use it with any other equipment.  
Care to be Taken During Handling  
• When traveling, take the Worldwide Service Network that is included in the  
package. This will be useful if you experience problems abroad.  
• When the camera has not been used for a long time, confirm that it is still  
working properly, particularly prior to taking important pictures (such as at a  
wedding or during traveling). Pictures cannot be guaranteed if recording,  
playback or transferring your data to a computer, etc. is not possible due to  
a malfunction of your camera or recording media (SD Memory Card), etc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
• Do not clean the product with organic solvents such as thinner or alcohol  
benzene.  
• Do not subject the camera to high temperatures or high humidity. Do not  
leave the camera in a vehicle, as the temperature can get very high.  
• Do not store the camera with preservatives and chemicals. Storage in high  
temperatures and high humidity can cause mold to grow on the camera.  
Remove from the case and store in a dry and well-ventilated location.  
• Do not subject the camera to strong vibrations, shocks, or pressure. Use a  
cushion to protect the camera from vibrations of motorcycles, automobiles,  
or ships.  
• The temperature range for camera use is 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F).  
• The monitor may appear black under high temperatures, but will return to  
normal as temperatures normalize.  
• The monitor may respond more slowly at low temperatures. This is due to  
liquid crystal properties, and is not a fault.  
• Periodic inspections are recommended every one to two years to maintain  
high performance.  
Sudden temperature changes will cause condensation on the inside and  
outside of the camera. Place the camera in your bag or a plastic bag, removing  
the camera after temperature of the camera and surroundings are equalized.  
• Avoid contact with garbage, mud, sand, dust, water, toxic gases, or salts.  
These could cause a camera breakdown. Wipe dry any rain or water drops  
on the camera.  
• Refer to “Precautions When Using the SD Memory Card” (p.41) regarding  
the SD Memory Card.  
• Use a lens brush to remove dust accumulated on the lens or viewfinder.  
Never use a spray blower for cleaning as it may damage the lens.  
• Please contact PENTAX Service Center for professional cleaning of the  
CMOS sensor. (This will involve a fee.)  
• Please do not press forcefully on the monitor. This could cause breakage or  
malfunction.  
• Precautions for D-LI50 Battery Usage:  
- DO NOT INCINERATE, DISASSEMBLE, SHORT CIRCUIT, DISPOSE OF  
IN FIRE OR HEAT ABOVE 140°F / 60°C. MAY CAUSE BURST OR BURN.  
- USE DESIGNATED CHARGER ONLY.  
Regarding Product Registration  
In order to better serve you, we request that you complete the product registration,  
which can be found on the CD-ROM supplied with the camera or on the PENTAX  
website. Thank you for your cooperation.  
Refer to the PENTAX PHOTO Browser 3/PENTAX PHOTO Laboratory 3 Operating  
Manual (Windows users: p.9, Mac OS users: p.10) for more information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Memo  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
Contents  
FOR USING YOUR CAMERA SAFELY ...............................................1  
ABOUT THE CAMERA.........................................................................1  
PRECAUTIONS FOR BATTERY USAGE............................................2  
PRECAUTIONS FOR BATTERY CHARGER USAGE.........................3  
Care to be Taken During Handling .......................................................3  
Contents ...............................................................................................6  
Composition of the Operating Manual ................................................11  
Before Using Your Camera  
13  
u Camera Characteristics ................................................ 14  
Checking the Contents of the Package...................................... 16  
Names and Functions of Working Parts.................................... 17  
Camera...............................................................................................17  
Capture Mode.....................................................................................18  
Playback Mode ...................................................................................20  
Display Indicators ........................................................................ 22  
Monitor................................................................................................22  
Viewfinder...........................................................................................27  
LCD Panel ..........................................................................................29  
How to Operate the Menu............................................................ 30  
Using the Mode Dial..................................................................... 32  
Getting Started  
33  
Attaching the Strap...................................................................... 34  
Using the Battery ......................................................................... 35  
Charging the Battery...........................................................................35  
Inserting/Removing the Battery ..........................................................36  
Battery Level Indicator........................................................................38  
Approximate Image Storage Capacity and Playback Time  
(Exclusive Battery Fully Charged) ......................................................38  
Using the AC Adapter (Optional) ........................................................39  
Inserting/Removing the SD Memory Card ................................. 40  
Recorded Pixels and Quality Level.....................................................42  
Turning the Camera On and Off.................................................. 44  
Initial Settings .............................................................................. 45  
Setting the Display Language.............................................................45  
Setting the Date and Time..................................................................48  
Attaching the Lens....................................................................... 50  
Adjusting the Viewfinder Diopter ............................................... 52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Basic Operations  
53  
Basic Shooting Operation........................................................... 54  
Holding the Camera............................................................................54  
Letting the Camera Choose the Optimal Settings ..............................55  
Using a Zoom Lens...................................................................... 59  
Using the Built-in Flash............................................................... 60  
Taking Pictures Using the Shake Reduction Function............. 65  
Turning On the Shake Reduction Function.........................................66  
Setting the Shake Reduction Function ...............................................67  
Playing Back Still Pictures.......................................................... 68  
Playing Back Images ..........................................................................68  
Deleting Images ........................................................................... 70  
Deleting a Single Image......................................................................70  
Shooting Functions  
71  
How to Operate the Shooting Menus ......................................... 72  
[A Rec. Mode] Menu Setting Items...................................................72  
[A Custom Setting] Menu Setting Items.............................................73  
Shooting Fn Menu Setting Items ........................................................75  
Setting the Exposure ................................................................... 76  
Effect of Aperture and Shutter Speed.................................................76  
Setting the Sensitivity .........................................................................78  
Changing the Exposure Mode ............................................................80  
Selecting the Metering Method...........................................................98  
Adjusting the Exposure.....................................................................100  
Shooting in Multi-exposure Mode .....................................................103  
Focusing ..................................................................................... 104  
Using the Autofocus..........................................................................104  
Selecting the Focusing Area (AF Point)............................................107  
Fixing the Focus (Focus Lock)..........................................................108  
Adjusting the Focus Manually (Manual Focus).................................110  
Using the = Button ........................................................................112  
Shooting in Catch-in Focus Mode.....................................................112  
Checking the Composition, Exposure and Focus Before  
Shooting ..................................................................................... 113  
Selecting the Preview Method ..........................................................113  
Displaying the Preview .....................................................................114  
Continuous Shooting................................................................. 117  
Interval Shooting........................................................................ 120  
Self-Timer Shooting................................................................... 122  
Remote Control Shooting (Remote Control F:  
Sold Separately)......................................................................... 125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
Using Mirror Up Function to Prevent Camera Shake ............. 128  
Changing the Shooting Conditions Automatically when  
Shooting (Auto Bracket)............................................................ 129  
Storing User Settings ................................................................ 133  
Using the Flash  
135  
Compensating Flash Output..................................................... 136  
Allowing Shooting while Charging Flash ................................ 137  
Flash Characteristics in Each Exposure Mode ....................... 138  
Distance and Aperture when Using the Built-in Flash ........... 141  
DA, D FA, FA J, FA and F Lens Compatibility  
with the Built-in Flash................................................................ 142  
Using an External Flash (Optional) .......................................... 143  
Shooting Settings  
153  
Setting the Image Processing Method in Capture Mode  
(Custom Image).......................................................................... 154  
Setting the File Format .............................................................. 156  
Setting the JPEG Recorded Pixels...................................................156  
Setting the JPEG Quality Level ........................................................157  
Setting the File Format .....................................................................158  
Setting the RAW Button Function.....................................................159  
Setting the White Balance ................................................................160  
Setting the Color Space....................................................................167  
Playback Functions  
169  
How to Operate the Menus During Playback........................... 170  
[Q Playback] Menu Setting Items...................................................170  
[A Custom Setting] Menu Setting Items...........................................170  
Playback Fn Menu Setting Items......................................................171  
Rotating Images ......................................................................... 172  
Enlarging Playback Images ...................................................... 173  
Displaying Multiple Images....................................................... 175  
Displaying a Folder.................................................................... 177  
Comparing Images..................................................................... 178  
Slideshow ................................................................................... 179  
Setting the Slideshow Display Interval..............................................181  
Changing Playback Display Method ........................................ 182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9
Deleting Multiple Images........................................................... 185  
Deleting All Images...........................................................................185  
Deleting Selected Images (from Multi-image Display)......................186  
Deleting a Folder ..............................................................................188  
Protecting Images from Deletion (Protect).............................. 189  
Connecting the Camera to AV Equipment............................... 191  
Processing Images  
193  
Processing Images with Digital Filters .................................... 194  
Editing RAW Images.................................................................. 197  
Editing One RAW Image...................................................................197  
Editing All RAW Images....................................................................198  
Specifying the Parameters................................................................200  
Printing from the Camera  
203  
Setting the Printing Service (DPOF)......................................... 204  
Printing Single Images......................................................................204  
Settings for All Images......................................................................205  
Printing Using PictBridge.......................................................... 207  
Setting Transfer Mode ......................................................................208  
Connecting the Camera to the Printer ..............................................209  
Printing Single Images......................................................................210  
Printing All Images............................................................................212  
Printing Images Using the DPOF Settings........................................213  
Disconnecting the USB Cable ..........................................................213  
Camera Settings  
215  
How to Operate the [R Set-up] Menu ...................................... 216  
[R Set-up] Menu Setting Items.........................................................216  
Formatting the SD Memory Card.............................................. 218  
Setting the Beep Setting, Date and Time, and Display  
Language .................................................................................... 219  
Turning the Beep On and Off............................................................219  
Changing the Date and Time and the Display Style.........................220  
Setting the World Time .....................................................................221  
Setting the Display Language...........................................................224  
Adjusting the Monitor and the Menu Display.......................... 225  
Setting the Text Size.........................................................................225  
Setting the Guide Display Time ........................................................225  
Adjusting the Brightness of the Monitor............................................226  
Adjusting the Color of the Monitor (LCD Color Tuning) ....................226  
Setting the Display for Instant Review, Live View and Digital  
Preview.............................................................................................227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10  
Setting the Image File Naming Convention............................. 230  
Selecting the Folder Name ...............................................................230  
Selecting the File Number Setting ....................................................230  
Setting the File Name .......................................................................231  
Selecting the Video Output Format and Power Settings........ 233  
Selecting the Video Output Format...................................................233  
Setting Auto Power Off .....................................................................233  
Selecting a Battery............................................................................234  
Using Pixel Mapping.................................................................. 235  
Selecting Capture Mode Settings to Save in the Camera ...... 236  
Resetting to Default Settings  
237  
Resetting Rec. Mode/Playback/Set-up Menu........................... 238  
Resetting the Custom Function Menu ..................................... 239  
Resetting Other Settings........................................................... 240  
Resetting Saved USER Settings ......................................................240  
Resetting the File Name ...................................................................241  
Resetting the Saved AF Adjustment Value.......................................241  
Appendix  
243  
Default Settings.......................................................................... 244  
Functions Available with Various Lens Combinations .......... 249  
Notes on [36. Using Aperture Ring] ......................................... 251  
Cleaning the CMOS Sensor....................................................... 252  
Removing Dust by Shaking the CMOS Sensor ................................252  
Detecting Dust on the CMOS Sensor (Dust Alert)............................252  
Removing Dust with a Blower...........................................................254  
Optional Accessories ................................................................ 256  
Error Messages .......................................................................... 261  
Troubleshooting......................................................................... 264  
Main Specifications ................................................................... 266  
Glossary...................................................................................... 270  
Index............................................................................................ 275  
WARRANTY POLICY.................................................................. 280  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11  
Composition of the Operating Manual  
This Operating Manual contains the following chapters.  
1 Before Using Your Camera  
1
2
Explains camera characteristics, accessories and the names and functions of various  
parts.  
2 Getting Started  
Explains your first steps from purchasing the camera to taking pictures. Be sure to read  
it and follow the instructions.  
3
3 Basic Operations  
Explains the procedures for taking and playing back still pictures.  
4
4 Shooting Functions  
Explains the shooting-related functions.  
5
5 Using the Flash  
Explains how to use the built-in flash and the external flash.  
6
6 Shooting Settings  
Explains the procedures for configuring image processing and setting the save format.  
7
7 Playback Functions  
Explains the procedures for playing back, deleting, and protecting still pictures.  
8 Processing Images  
8
Explains the procedures for using image filters and processing pictures taken in RAW  
format.  
9
9 Printing from the Camera  
Explains the procedures for setting the print settings and printing still pictures while  
directly connected to a printer.  
10  
11  
12  
10 Camera Settings  
Explains the procedures for changing the camera settings, such as the monitor settings  
and the image file naming convention.  
11 Resetting to Default Settings  
Explains the procedure for resetting all settings to their default settings.  
12 Appendix  
Explains troubleshooting, introduces optional accessories and provides various  
resources.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12  
The symbols used in this Operating Manual are explained below.  
Shows reference page number explaining a related operation.  
1
Shows useful information.  
Shows precautions to take when operating the camera.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 Before Using Your  
Camera  
Check the package contents and names and functions of  
working parts before use.  
u Camera Characteristics ........................14  
Checking the Contents of the Package ..............16  
Names and Functions of Working Parts ............17  
Display Indicators ................................................22  
How to Operate the Menu ....................................30  
Using the Mode Dial .............................................32  
When using menus and Fn menu, items which cannot be changed due  
to camera settings appear gray and cannot be selected.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14  
u Camera Characteristics  
• Features a 23.4×15.6 mm CMOS sensor with approximately 14.6 million  
effective pixels for high precision and a wide dynamic range.  
• Features Shake Reduction (SR), an image sensor shifting shake  
reduction system. This enables you to capture sharp pictures with  
minimal camera shake regardless of the lens type.  
1
• Features an AF sensor with 11 focusing points. The central 9 are wide  
cross area sensors.  
• Provides high-speed continuous shooting up to a maximum of  
approximately 21 frames per second.  
• Features a viewfinder similar to that of a conventional 35 mm camera,  
with a magnification of approximately 0.95 and field of view of  
approximately 95%, for easier manual focusing. Also features a  
superimpose function in which the AF points on the viewfinder illuminate  
red.  
• Features a large 2.7-inch monitor with approximately 230,000 dots, a  
wide viewing angle and brightness and color adjusting function for high-  
precision viewing performance.  
• Features a live view function for shooting while viewing the subject in  
real-time on the monitor.  
• A user-friendly design has been implemented in various parts of the  
camera. The large text, high-contrast monitor and easy-to-use menus  
make the camera easier to operate.  
• Dials, buttons, body joints, and retractable parts of the camera are  
splash and dust resistant.  
• The CMOS sensor features a special SP coating against dust deposit.  
The Dust Removal function also shakes the CMOS for removing  
collected dust.  
• Supports the optional Battery Grip D-BG2 with vertical shutter release  
button. If a battery (D-LI50) is inserted in both the camera and grip, the  
battery with more power is prioritized. This enables you to get the best  
camera performance for an extended period. A menu item also allows  
you to prioritize a battery and use its full power before switching to the  
other battery.  
• Features Custom Image with options such as Fine Sharpness and Filter  
Effect. These options allow you to make detailed settings, enabling a  
wider range of expression.  
• Records in the versatile JPEG format or the high quality and fully  
editable RAW format. You can also select JPEG+RAW and record in  
both formats. Pictures taken in RAW format can be easily processed  
internally by the camera.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15  
• Features Hyper-program and Hyper-manual modes that let you take  
pictures with the intended exposure. Also features Sensitivity Priority  
mode K that automatically adjusts aperture and shutter speed  
according to the set sensitivity, and Shutter & Aperture Priority mode  
L that automatically adjusts sensitivity according to the set aperture  
and shutter speed.  
1
The captured area (view angle) will differ between the u and 35 mm SLR  
cameras even if the same lens is used because the format size for 35 mm film  
and CMOS sensor are different.  
Sizes for 35 mm film and CMOS sensor  
35 mm film  
: 36×24 mm  
u CMOS sensor : 23.4×15.6 mm  
Angles of view being equal, the focal length of a lens used with a 35 mm camera  
must be approximately 1.5 times longer than that of  
u. To obtain an angle of  
view framing the same area, divide the focal length of the 35 mm lens by 1.5.  
Example) To capture the same image as a 150 mm lens attached to a 35 mm  
camera  
150÷1.5=100  
Use a 100 mm lens with the u.  
Inversely, multiply the focal length of the lens used with u by 1.5 to  
determine the focal length for 35 mm cameras.  
Example) If 300 mm lens is used with u  
300×1.5=450  
Focal length is equivalent to a 450 mm lens on a 35 mm camera.  
Shake Reduction (SR)  
Shake Reduction (SR) on the u features a PENTAX original  
system which uses magnetic force to move the image sensor at high  
speeds, compensating camera shake.  
The camera may generate some operating noise when it is shaken, such  
as when changing the composition of a picture. It is not a malfunction.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16  
Checking the Contents of the  
Package  
The following accessories are packaged with your camera.  
Check that all accessories are included.  
1
Hot shoe cover FK  
Eyecup FP  
ME Viewfinder cap  
(Installed on camera)  
(Installed on camera)  
Sync socket 2P cap  
(Installed on camera)  
Body mount cover  
(Installed on camera)  
USB cable  
I-USB17  
Video cable  
I-VC28  
Software (CD-ROM)  
S-SW74, S-SW75  
Strap  
O-ST53  
Rechargeable lithium-ion  
D-LI50 battery  
Battery charger  
D-BC50  
AC plug cord  
Operating Manual  
(this manual)  
Quick Guide  
PENTAX PHOTO Browser 3/ PENTAX REMOTE  
PENTAX PHOTO Laboratory  
Assistant 3  
Operating Manual Operating Manual  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17  
Names and Functions of Working  
Parts  
Camera  
1
Hot shoe  
Self-Timer lamp/  
Remote control receiver  
Mirror  
Strap lug  
X-sync socket  
AF coupler  
Card cover  
Lens mount index  
Lens unlock button  
Lens information  
contacts  
Diopter adjustment lever  
Built-in Flash  
LCD panel  
Viewfinder  
Self-timer lamp/  
Remote control  
receiver  
Cable switch  
terminal  
Card cover  
unlock lever  
USB/Video terminal  
DC input terminal  
Card access  
lamp  
Terminal cover  
Monitor  
Battery cover  
unlock lever  
Tripod socket  
Battery grip connector  
terminal cover  
Battery cover  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
18  
Capture Mode  
Functions of buttons, dials and levers used during shooting are noted.  
* The factory default settings are explained here. Depending on the button  
or dial, these settings can be changed in the [A Custom Settings] menu  
(p.73).  
1
2
1
3
4
8
7
6
5
9
m
l
k
j
0
a
i
h
g
f
e
b
c
d
1 Green button  
3 Main switch  
Sets the Exposure mode to  
Automatic Exposure (p.85,  
p.92, p.95) and resets the  
settings (p.101, p.136).  
Move to turn the power on/off  
(p.44) or to preview (p.114).  
4 Front e-dial  
Sets shutter speed and EV  
compensation values.  
2 Shutter release button  
Press to capture images.  
(p.57)  
5 Lens unlock button  
Press to detach lens. (p.51)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
19  
6 Focus mode lever  
e
{ button  
Switches between autofocus  
mode (k, l) (p.104)  
and manual focus mode (\)  
(p.110).  
Press to display the Fn menu.  
(
p.75)  
f Shake Reduction switch  
1
Turns the Shake Reduction  
function on or off. (p.65)  
7
8
| button  
Saves JPEG and RAW file by  
default. (p.158, p.159)  
g
4 button  
Saves thesetting youselected  
in the menu.  
K button  
Press to pop up the built-in  
flash. (p.60)  
Press when menu is not  
displayed to display the  
currently selected sensitivityin  
the LCD panel and viewfinder.  
9 Mode dial  
Changes the Exposure mode.  
(p.32)  
h Four-way controller  
(2345)  
0 Metering mode lever  
Use this to move cursor or  
change items in menus and  
Fn menu.  
Changes the Metering mode.  
(p.98)  
a
b
] button  
Sets Exposure bracket  
shooting. (p.129)  
i AF point switching dial  
Sets focus area. (p.107)  
j
k
= button  
Focuses on the target before  
metering. (p.104)  
3 button  
Displays the [A Rec. Mode]  
menu (p.72). Next, press the  
four-way controller (5) to  
display [Q Playback] menu  
(p.170), [R Set-up] menu  
(p.216) and [A Custom  
L button  
Locks the exposure before  
shooting. (p.102)  
l Rear e-dial  
Setting] menu (p.73).  
Sets the aperture and  
sensitivity values.  
c
d
M button  
Press to show shooting  
information on the monitor.  
(p.23)  
m
m button  
Turn the front e-dial while  
pressing this button to set the  
EVcompensationvalue. (p.100)  
Q button  
Switches to the Playback  
mode. (p.68)  
Press to illuminate the LCD  
panel. (p.29)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
20  
Playback Mode  
Functions of buttons, dials and levers used during playback are noted.  
* The factory default settings are explained here. Depending on the button  
or dial, these settings can be changed in the [A Custom Settings] menu  
(p.73).  
1
2
1
3
4
9
0
a
5
6
b
c
7
8
d
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
21  
1 Green button  
8
9
Q button  
Press to switch to Capture  
mode.  
Press in Enlarged view to  
increase the magnification.  
(p.173)  
m button  
2 Shutter release button  
1
Press in Enlarged view to  
decrease the magnification.  
(p.173)  
Press halfway to switch to  
Capture mode.  
3 Main switch  
0 Z button  
Move to turn the camera on  
and off. (p.44) Set to the |  
position to switch to Capture  
mode and preview.  
Press to protect images from  
being accidentally erased.  
(p.189)  
a Rear e-dial  
4 Front e-dial  
Use it to enlarge an image  
(p.173) or display multiple  
images at the same time  
(p.175).  
Use it to display the previous  
or next image during playback  
(p.69, p.173) or adjust the  
digital filter (p.194).  
b
4 button  
5
3 button  
Press to display the  
Saves thesetting youselected  
in the menu or playback  
screen.  
[Q Playback] menu (p.170).  
Next, press the four-way  
controller (45) to display  
[R Set-up] menu (p.216),  
[A Custom Setting] menu  
(p.73) and [A Rec. Mode]  
menu (p.72).  
c Four-way controller  
(2345)  
Use it to move cursor or  
change items in menus, Fn  
menu and playback screen.  
d
{ button  
6 ibutton  
Press to display the Fn menu.  
(p.171)  
Press to delete images. (p.70)  
7
M button  
Press to show shooting  
information on the monitor.  
(p.25)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
22  
Display Indicators  
Monitor  
1
The following indicators appear  
on the monitor depending on  
the status of the camera.  
Monitor  
At Start-up or when Operating the Mode Dial  
Guides appear on the monitor for 3 seconds when the camera is switched  
on or the mode dial is turned.  
Select Off for [Guide display] in [R Set-up] menu to not show indicators.  
(p.216)  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7  
MF  
1600  
8
9
16 USER  
15  
Shutter & Apperture  
Priority Auutomatic  
Exposure  
RAW  
RAW+  
P LINE  
10  
14  
AF  
Enable AF  
02 /02 /2008 10:39AM  
13 12  
11  
1
2
Flash mode  
(Active mode appears) (p.61)  
8
9
Shake Reduction (p.65)  
Exposure mode name (p.32)  
Drive mode/Auto bracket/  
Multi-exposure (p.75)  
10 e-dial guide  
11 Battery level  
3
4
5
6
7
AE metering (p.98)  
Focus mode (p.104)  
AF point position (p.107)  
White balance (p.160)  
Sensitivity (p.78)  
12 Date and time (p.220)  
13 World Time (p.221)  
14 Button guide  
15 Exposure mode  
16 USER mode  
* Indicators 3, 5, 6 and 7 only appear when a setting other than the default  
setting is selected. 8 only appears when Shake Reduction is Off. 13 only  
appears when World Time is On.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
23  
Capture Mode  
Press the M button in Capture mode to display the capture function  
settings on the monitor for 30 seconds.  
Press the four-way controller (23) while displayed to switch to Detailed  
information display.  
1
 Detailed information display (p.1)  
1
2
3
6
4
7
5
USER  
g
AF.C  
9
8
11  
12  
1/2000  
F2.8  
10  
400mm  
13  
14  
20  
+1.3  
-
1.0  
25  
15  
17  
16  
26  
27  
28  
29  
ISO AUTO 200-1600  
0
0
0
0
18 19  
21 22 23  
10000K G2 A1 AdobeRGB  
24  
10  
RAW+  
02 / 02 / 2008 10 : 39 AM  
30  
31  
32  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Exposure mode (p.32)  
USER mode (p.133)  
AE metering (p.98)  
Flash mode (p.61)  
Drive mode (p.75)  
16 ISO correction in AUTO (p.78)  
17 White balance (p.160)  
18 GM compensation (p.162)  
19 BA compensation (p.162)  
20 Color Space  
Exposure bracket (p.129)/  
Multi-exposure (p.103)  
21 File format (p.158)  
22 JPEG recorded pixels (p.156)  
23 JPEG quality (p.157)  
24 Shake Reduction (p.65)  
25 Image Tone (p.154)  
7
8
9
Extended bracket (p.131)  
Focus mode (p.104)  
AF point position (p.107)  
10 Lens focal length (p.65)  
11 Shutter speed (p.76)  
12 Aperture (p.77)  
26 Saturation/Filter Effect (p.154)  
27 Hue/Toning (p.154)  
28 Contrast (p.154)  
13 EV compensation (p.100)  
29 Sharpness/Fine Sharpness  
(p.154)  
14 Flash exposure compensation  
(p.136)  
30 World Time (p.221)  
31 Date and time (p.220)  
32 Battery power (p.38)  
15 Sensitivity (p.78)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
24  
 Detailed information display (p.2)  
1
1
2
3
RAW  
RAW+  
P LINE  
AF  
Enable AF  
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
Battery usage condition (p.234)  
Camera battery power (p.38, p.234)  
Grip battery power (p.38, p.234)  
Button guide  
e-dial guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
25  
Playback Mode  
Every time you press the  
M
button during playback, the camera switches  
screen displays in the following order: Standard display, Histogram display,  
Detailed information display and No information display (image only).  
1
You can change the information initially displayed by pressing the Q button.  
 Detailed information display  
1
3
4
15  
100-0001  
AF.S  
Av  
2
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
26 27 21  
5
6
7
24mm  
g
8
9
10 11  
14  
1/1200  
F2.8  
12  
24  
13  
+1.5  
-
0.5  
0
25  
ISO 200 10000K G2 A1  
RAW+  
0
0
0
28 29 30  
32  
31  
22  
23  
AdobeRGB  
14.6  
02 / 02 / 2008 10 : 39AM  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Rotation information  
Captured image  
Protect  
17 AF point position  
18 Lens focal length  
19 Image Tone  
Exposure mode  
Metering mode  
Flash mode  
20 Saturation/Filter Effect  
21 Hue/Toning  
22 Contrast  
Drive mode  
23 Sharpness/Fine Sharpness  
24 Sensitivity  
Shutter speed  
Shake Reduction  
25 White balance/Color temperature  
10 Exposure bracket/Multi-exposure 26 GM compensation  
11 Extended bracket  
12 Aperture  
27 BA compensation  
28 File format  
13 EV compensation  
14 Flash exposure compensation  
15 Folder No./File No.  
16 Focus mode  
29 JPEG recorded pixels  
30 JPEG quality  
31 Color Space  
32 Shooting date/time  
* Indicators 6 (Flash mode) and 14 (Flash exposure compensation) only appear  
for images in which the flash was discharged.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
26  
 Histogram Display  
The u features two histogram displays. The “Brightness histogram”  
shows the distribution of brightness and the “RGB histogram” shows the  
distribution of color intensity. Press the four-way controller (23) to switch  
between “Brightness histogram” and “RGB histogram”.  
1
1
2
1
4 3  
2
100-0001  
100-0001  
23  
23  
3
4
7
8
9
6
RGB  
6
5
5
Brightness histogram  
RGB histogram  
1
2
File Format  
6
Switch Brightness histogram/  
RGB histogram  
Folder No./File No. of the image  
(p.230)  
7
8
9
Histogram (R)  
Histogram (G)  
Histogram (B)  
3
4
5
Protect icon (p.189)  
DPOF settings (p.204)  
Histogram (Brightness) (p.182)  
* Indicator 4 (DPOF settings) only appears for images with DPOF settings.  
Areas where blooming or dark portions blink if [Bright/Dark area] warning is set  
to On in [Playback display] in the [Q Playback] menu. (p.182)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
27  
Viewfinder  
2
3
1
1
1
4
5
6
7
8
9
13  
15  
16  
10  
11 12 14  
1
2
3
4
AF frame (p.52)  
Spot metering frame (p.98)  
AF point (p.107)  
Flash status (p.60)  
Appears when flash is available and blinks when flash is recommended but  
not set or is being charged.  
5
6
7
Shutter speed (p.76)  
Shutter speed when capturing or adjusting (underlined when shutter speed  
can be adjusted with the front e-dial).  
Aperture (p.77)  
Aperture when capturing or adjusting (underlined when aperture can be  
adjusted with the rear e-dial).  
Focus indicator (p.56)  
Appears when image is focused.  
Blinks when the subject is not in focus.  
8
9
Manual focus (p.110)  
Appears when focus mode is \.  
EV bar (p.94, p.100)  
Shows the EV compensation values or difference between the appropriate  
and current exposure values when Exposure mode is set to a.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
28  
10 File format (p.158)  
Displays the image save format in RAW/RAW+ format.  
Not displayed in JPEG format.  
11 EV compensation (p.100)  
Appears when EV compensation is available or in use.  
12 Flash exposure compensation (p.136)  
Appears when Flash exposure compensation is in use.  
13 Sensitivity display  
1
Appears when sensitivity is displayed.  
14 AE lock indicator (p.102)  
Appears during AE lock.  
15 Number of recordable images/EV compensation/Confirm sensitivity  
Show the number of recordable images with current file format (p.158),  
JPEG recorded pixels (p.156) and JPEG quality (p.157).  
EV compensation value appears when EV compensation is being adjusted  
(p.100).  
ISO sensitivity appears if Sensitivity Priority Mode/Shutter & Aperture  
Priority Mode is set.  
16 Shake Reduction (p.65)  
Appears during Shake Reduction.  
• The AF point in use for autofocus is superimposed in red when the shutter  
release button is pressed halfway. (p.107)  
• When [13. AF Button Function] is set to [Cancel AF] in the [A Custom  
Setting] menu, press the = button to display \in the viewfinder.  
• When set to a mode other than Sensitivity Priority Mode/Shutter & Aperture  
Priority Mode, press the 4 button to display the ISO sensitivity in 15. (p.79)  
• When set to Sensitivity Priority Mode/Shutter & Aperture Priority Mode, press  
the 4 button to display the number of recordable images in 15.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
29  
LCD Panel  
The following information appears in the LCD panel on top of the camera.  
1
14 6  
5
7
8
9
12  
11  
1
2
3
4 10  
13  
1
2
3
Shutter speed (p.76)  
Aperture (p.77)  
Flash mode (p.60)  
6
Auto bracket (p.129)  
(blinkswhenExposure Bracket and  
Extended Bracket are both set)  
Flash exposure compensation (p.136)  
EV compensation (p.100)  
Battery level  
b
: Built-in flash is ready  
(whenblinking, flashshould  
be used)  
7
8
9
>
3
Q
w
: Red-eye reduction flash on 10 White balance (p.160)  
(Not displayed when set to Auto)  
: Auto discharge  
: Slow-speed sync  
: Wireless  
O
: White balance correction  
11 Sensitivity display  
Appears when sensitivity is displayed.  
4
5
Drive mode (p.75)  
9
: Single frame shooting  
12  
1
: RAW capture  
j
g
: Continuous shooting  
: Self-timer shooting  
1P : RAW+JPEG capture  
13 Recordable image no./  
EV compensation/PC (Pb)  
(PC: Personal Computer (mass  
storage), Pb: PictBridge)  
W
: Remote control shooting  
EV bar (p.94, p.100)  
14 Multi-exposure (p.103)  
Press the m button to illuminate the LCD panel. You can set it to not illuminate  
in [27. Illuminate LCD panel] in the [A Custom Setting] menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
30  
How to Operate the Menu  
This section explains operation methods for [A Rec. Mode] menu,  
[Q Playback] menu, [R Set-up] menu and [A Custom Setting] menu.  
1
Displaying the Menu screen  
1
Press the 3 button in  
Capture mode.  
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears on  
the monitor.  
Rec. Mode  
14.6M  
JPEG Rec. Pixels  
JPEG Quality  
File Format  
JPEG  
PEF  
Off  
RAW file format  
Extended Bracket  
Multi-exposure  
Off  
MENU  
Exit  
1/2  
2
Press the four-way controller  
(5).  
Set-up  
USER  
Format  
The [Q Playback] menu, [R Set-up]  
menu and [A Custom Setting] menu  
appear in order each time the four-way  
controller is pressed. (The screen for  
the [R Set-up] menu is shown on the  
right.)  
Beep  
Date Adjust  
World Time  
Language  
English  
1/4  
MENU  
Exit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
31  
Selecting and Setting a Menu Item  
Procedure to set the [JPEG Quality] on the [A Rec. Mode] menu is  
explained as an example.  
1
3
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to choose an item.  
Rec. Mode  
14.6  
M
JPEG Rec. Pixels  
JPEG Quality  
Turn the front e-dial to navigate the  
menu a page at a time.  
File Format  
JPEG  
PEF  
Off  
RAW file format  
Extended Bracket  
Multi-exposure  
Off  
MENU  
Exit  
1/2  
4
Press the four-way controller (  
5).  
128  
Quality levels available when recording  
in JPEG format are displayed.  
14.6M  
JPEG Rec. Pixels  
JPEG Quality  
File Format  
Press the four-way controller (  
move to the pop-up menu if there is one.  
5) to  
RAW file format  
Extended Bracket  
Multi-exposure  
Off  
OK  
When the quality level is changed, the  
number of recordable images at that quality  
level appears at the top right of the screen.  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
5
6
Use the four-way controller (23) to select a setting.  
Press the 4 button.  
The camera returns to the menu screen. Next, set other items.  
Press the 3 button to return to Capture or Playback mode.  
Even after you press the 3 button and close the menu screen, your  
settings will not be saved if the camera is turned off improperly (such as by  
removing the battery while the camera is on).  
You can use the front e-dial to display the previous/next page and the rear e-dial to  
switch among the [ Rec. Mode] menu, the [ Playback] menu, [ Set-up] menu,  
and [ Custom Setting] menu when no pop-up menu is displayed.  
A
Q
R
A
• If the 3 button is pressed in Capture mode, the [A Rec. Mode] menu  
appears. If the 3 button is pressed in Playback mode, the  
[Q Playback] menu appears.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
32  
Using the Mode Dial  
Dial indicator  
1
You can switch the Exposure mode by setting the icons on the mode dial  
to the dial indicator.  
Item  
Function  
Page  
A (USER)  
Lets you capture images with settings that you set. p.133  
Automatically sets shutter speed and aperture to the  
B (Green)  
proper exposure according to Program line when  
taking pictures.  
p.83  
Automatically sets shutter speed and aperture to the  
proper exposure according to Program line when  
taking pictures. You can use the front and rear e-  
dials to easily switch between shutter priority and  
aperture priority.  
e (Hyper-  
program)  
p.84  
K (Sensitivity  
Priority)  
Automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture to  
the proper exposure according to the set sensitivity.  
p.85  
p.87  
p.89  
b (Shutter  
Priority)  
Lets you set the desired shutter speed to freeze or  
emphasize subject movement.  
c(Aperture  
Priority)  
Set aperture for controlling the depth of field.  
Automatically sets the sensitivity so that the  
L (Shutter &  
selected shutter speed and aperture will give the  
p.91  
Aperture Priority) proper exposure according to the brightness of the  
subject.  
Lets you set shutter speed and aperture to capture  
a(Hyper-manual)  
p.93  
p.96  
the picture with creative intent.  
Lets you capture images that require slow shutter  
p (Bulb)  
speeds such as fireworks and night scenes.  
The shutter speed is locked at 1/180 seconds. Use  
M (Flash X-sync  
this when using an External flash that does not  
speed)  
p.97  
automatically change the shutter speed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Getting Started  
This chapter explains your first steps from purchasing the  
camera to taking pictures. Be sure to read it and follow the  
instructions.  
Attaching the Strap ..............................................34  
Using the Battery ..................................................35  
Inserting/Removing the SD Memory Card .........40  
Turning the Camera On and Off ..........................44  
Initial Settings .......................................................45  
Attaching the Lens ...............................................50  
Adjusting the Viewfinder Diopter ........................52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
34  
Attaching the Strap  
1
Pass the end of the strap  
through the strap lug, then  
secure it on the inside of the  
clasp.  
2
2
Pass the other end of the strap  
through the other strap lug on  
the camera, then secure it on  
the inside of the clasp.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
35  
Using the Battery  
Insert the battery into the camera. Use only a D-LI50 battery.  
Charging the Battery  
2
Battery charger D-BC50  
Battery D-LI50  
AC plug cord  
Indicator lamp  
When using the battery for the first time, or when the battery has not been  
used in a long time, or when [Battery depleted] appears, recharge the  
battery.  
Note: AC plug cord “Listed, Type SPT-2 or NISPT-2, 18/2 flexible  
cord, rated 125 V, 7A, minimum 6ft (1.8m)”  
1
Connect the AC plug cord to the battery charger.  
Plug the AC plug cord into the power outlet.  
2
3
Face the S mark on the exclusive battery up and insert it  
into the battery charger.  
The indicator lamp is lit red during charging.  
The indicator lamp turns off when the battery is fully charged.  
4
When the battery is fully charged, remove the battery from  
the battery charger.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
36  
• Do not use the provided battery charger to charge batteries other than  
rechargeable lithium-ion battery D-LI50. Charging other batteries may cause  
damage or heating.  
• If the battery is correctly oriented and inserted into the battery charger but the  
indicator lamp is not lit, the battery is faulty. Install a new battery in the  
camera.  
• The maximum charging time is approximately 180 minutes. Charge in a  
location where the temperature is between 0°C and 40°C. (Charge time  
depends on temperature and remaining battery power.)  
2
• If usage time is reduced even when properly charged, the battery has  
reached the end of its usage span. Install a new battery in the camera.  
Inserting/Removing the Battery  
When using the battery for the first time, charge the battery and insert it into  
the camera.  
• Do not open the battery cover or remove the battery while the power is on.  
• Remove the battery when you will not use the camera for a long while. The  
battery may leak.  
• If the date and time settings have been reset when you insert a new battery  
after a long time, follow the procedure for “Setting the Date and Time”. (p.48)  
• Insert the battery correctly. If the battery is inserted incorrectly, it may cause  
camera breakdown. Wipe the electrodes of the battery with a soft dry cloth  
before inserting.  
• Be careful as the camera or battery may become hot when the camera is  
used continuously for a long period of time.  
1
Open the battery cover.  
2
Lift the battery cover unlock lever, turn  
towards OPEN (1) to unlock, and then  
pull the cover open (2).  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
37  
2
3
Face the S mark on the battery towards the monitor, push  
the battery lock lever in the direction of the arrow (1) and  
insert the battery.  
Insert until the battery locks.  
To remove the battery, push  
the battery lock lever in the  
direction of the arrow (1) with  
2
your hand. The battery pops  
1
out slightly. Remove it.  
Battery lock lever  
Close the battery cover (1)  
and turn the battery cover  
1
unlock lever towards CLOSE  
2
(2) to lock.  
Stow the battery cover unlock lever  
when finished closing.  
Use the AC adapter D-AC50 (optional) when using the camera for a prolonged  
period. (p.39)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
38  
Battery Level Indicator  
You can confirm remaining battery level by checking the { displayed on  
the LCD panel.  
{
lit  
: Battery is full.  
}
lit  
: Battery is running low.  
2
?
lit  
: Battery is almost empty.  
?
blink  
: The camera turns off after displaying a message.  
} may appear even when the battery level is sufficient if the camera is  
used at low temperatures or when performing continuous shooting  
consecutively. Turn the camera off and on again. If { appears, you can  
use the camera.  
{ does not appear on the LCD panel when using the AC adapter.  
Approximate Image Storage Capacity and  
Playback Time (Exclusive Battery Fully Charged)  
Flash photography  
50% use 100% use  
Normal  
recording  
Playback  
time  
Battery  
D-LI50  
(Temperature)  
(23°C)  
740  
700  
530  
430  
420  
320  
330 minutes  
300 minutes  
( 0°C)  
The picture storage capacity (flash use 50%) is based on measuring conditions in  
accordance with CIPA standards and the others are based on PENTAX measuring  
conditions. Some deviation from the above figures may occur in actual use  
depending on shooting mode and shooting conditions.  
• Battery performance temporarily decreases as the temperature decreases.  
When using the camera in cold climates, have extra batteries on hand and  
keep them warm in your pocket. Battery performance will return to normal  
when returned to room temperature.  
• Have extra batteries ready when traveling overseas, taking pictures in cold  
climates, or when you will be taking a lot of pictures.  
• If usage time is reduced even when properly charged, the battery has  
reached the end of its usage span. Install a new battery in the camera.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
39  
Using the AC Adapter (Optional)  
1
2
2
We recommend using the AC adapter D-AC50 (optional) when using the  
monitor for a long time or when connecting to your PC.  
1
Make sure the camera is turned off and open the terminal  
cover.  
2
Face the S mark on the DC terminal of the AC adapter  
towards the S mark on the camera, and connect the DC  
terminal to the DC input terminal of the camera.  
3
4
Connect the AC plug cord to the AC adapter.  
Plug the AC cord into the power outlet.  
• Make sure the camera is turned off before connecting or disconnecting the  
AC adapter.  
• Make sure connections are secure between the camera, AC adapter, AC  
plug cord terminal and the power outlet. SD Memory Card and data will be  
corrupted if disconnected while camera is recording or reading data.  
• Be sure to read the AC adapter D-AC50 operating manual when using the  
AC adapter.  
• The battery in your camera will not charge when connected to the AC  
adapter.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
40  
Inserting/Removing the SD Memory  
Card  
This camera uses either an SD Memory Card or an SDHC Memory Card. (Both  
cards are referred to as SD Memory Cards hereafter.) Make sure the camera is  
turned off before inserting or removing the SD Memory Card (market product).  
• Do not remove the SD Memory Card while the card access lamp is lit.  
• Use this camera to format (initialize) an SD Memory Card that is unused or  
has been used on other cameras or digital devices. Refer to “Formatting the  
SD Memory Card” (p.218) for details on formatting.  
2
1
Lift the card cover unlock lever  
(1) and turn it towards OPEN  
(2).  
The card cover opens.  
2
1
2
Insert the card all the way with  
the SD Memory Card label  
toward the monitor.  
Push the SD Memory Card in once to  
remove.  
3
Close the card cover.  
Be sure to fully close the card cover. The  
camera will not turn on if the card cover is  
open.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
41  
Precautions When Using the SD Memory Card  
• The SD Memory Card is equipped with a  
write-protect switch. Setting the switch to  
LOCK protects the existing data by  
Write-protect  
switch  
prohibiting recording of new data, deletion  
of existing data or formatting of the card.  
• Care should be taken when removing the SD Memory Card immediately after  
using the camera because the card may be hot.  
• Do not remove the SD Memory Card or turn the camera off while data is being  
saved to the card, images are being played back, or the camera is connected  
to a computer with the USB cable. This may cause the data to be lost or the  
card to be damaged.  
2
• Do not bend the SD Memory Card or subject it to violent impact. Keep it away  
from water and store away from high temperatures.  
Do not remove the SD Memory Card during formatting. The card may be  
damaged beyond use.  
• Data on the SD Memory Card may be deleted in the following circumstances.  
PENTAX does not accept any liability for data that is deleted if  
(1) the SD Memory Card is mishandled by the user.  
(2) the SD Memory Card is exposed to static electricity or electrical  
interference.  
(3) the card has not been used for a long time.  
(4) the card is ejected or the battery is removed while the data on the card is  
being recorded or accessed.  
• The SD Memory Card has a limited service life. If it is not used for a long time,  
the data on the card may become unreadable. Be sure to regularly make a  
backup of important data on a computer.  
• Avoid using or storing the card where it may be exposed to static electricity or  
electrical interference.  
• Avoid using or storing the card in direct sunlight or where it may be exposed to  
rapid changes in temperature or to condensation.  
• For information on compatible SD Memory Cards, visit the PENTAX website.  
• Format new SD Memory Cards. Also format SD Memory Cards used with other  
cameras. 1 Formatting the SD Memory Card (p.218)  
• Please note that formatting the SD Memory Card will not necessarily delete the  
data so that it cannot be recovered using off the shelf data recovery software.  
If you are going to discard, give away or sell your SD Memory Card you should  
ensure that the data on the card is completely deleted or the card itself is  
destroyed if it contains any personal or sensitive information. There are off the  
shelf secure data deletion software programs available that will completely  
delete the data.  
In any case the data on your SD Memory Card should be managed at your own  
risk.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
42  
Recorded Pixels and Quality Level  
When the File Format is JPEG  
Choose the number of pixels (size) and quality level (JPEG data  
compression rate) of pictures according to how you intend to use the  
pictures you have taken.  
2
Pictures with larger recorded pixels or more Es are clearer when printed.  
The number of pictures that can be taken (the number of pictures that can  
be recorded on an SD Memory Card) decreases with larger file sizes.  
The quality of the captured photo or printed picture depends on the quality  
level, exposure control, resolution of the printer and a variety of other  
factors so you do not need to select more than the required number of  
pixels. For example, to print in postcard size, i (1824×1216) is  
adequate. Set the appropriate recorded size and quality level depending  
on purpose.  
Choose the appropriate number of recorded pixels and quality level for  
JPEG images on the [ARec. Mode] menu.  
1Setting the JPEG Recorded Pixels (p.156)  
1Setting the JPEG Quality Level (p.157)  
 JPEG Recorded Pixels, JPEG Quality and Approximate Image  
Storage Capacity  
JPEG Quality  
Z
C
D
E
Premium  
Best  
Better  
Good  
JPEG Rec. Pixels  
34  
50  
58  
84  
105  
148  
245  
616  
205  
308  
(4672×3104)  
X
J
P
i
(3872×2592)  
(3008×2000)  
(1824×1216)  
88  
142  
368  
457  
230  
1118  
• The above table shows the approximate image storage capacity when using a  
512 MB SD Memory Card.  
• The above figures may vary depending on the subject, shooting conditions,  
shooting mode and SD Memory Card, etc.  
When the number of storable images exceeds 500, captured images are  
divided into folders of 500 images each. However, in Auto Bracket, images will  
be stored in the same folder until shooting is completed, even if the number of  
images exceeds 500.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
43  
When the File Format is RAW  
With u, you can record in the versatile JPEG format or the high  
quality and editable RAW format. For RAW file format, you can select the  
PENTAX original PEF format or general-purpose DNG (Digital Negative)  
format designed by Adobe Systems. On a 512 MB SD Memory Card, you  
can record up to 20 images in PEF format or DNG format.  
1Setting the File Format (p.158)  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
44  
Turning the Camera On and Off  
1
Move the main switch to [ON]  
position.  
The camera will turn on.  
Move the main switch to [OFF] position  
to turn off the camera.  
2
• Always turn the camera off when not in use.  
• The power will automatically turn off when you do not perform any operations  
within a set period of time. To reactivate the camera after the camera turns  
off automatically, turn it on again or perform any of the following.  
• Press the shutter release button halfway.  
• Press the Q button.  
• Press the M button.  
By default, the camera is set to power off automatically after 1 minute of  
inactivity. You can change the setting with [Auto Power Off] on the [  
menu. (p.233)  
R
Set-up]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
45  
Initial Settings  
The first time the camera is turned on after  
purchasing, the [Language/  
] screen  
appears on the monitor. Follow the  
procedure below to set the language  
displayed on the monitor and the current  
date and time. Once setting is done, these  
will not need to be set again when turning  
your camera on.  
2
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
If the Date Adjust screen appears, set the  
date and time by following the procedure in  
“Setting the Date and Time” (p.48).  
Date Adjust  
Date Style  
mm/dd/yy 24h  
01 / 01 / 2008  
00 : 00  
Date  
Time  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Setting the Display Language  
You can choose the language in which the menus, error messages, etc.  
are displayed from the following: English, French, German, Spanish,  
Portuguese, Italian, Dutch, Danish, Swedish, Finnish, Polish, Czech,  
Hungarian, Turkish, Russian, Korean, Chinese (traditional/simplified) and  
Japanese.  
1
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to select the desired  
language.  
The default setting is English.  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
46  
2
Press the 4 button.  
The [Initial Setting] screen for the  
selected language appears.  
Initial Setting  
Language  
English  
Std.  
Press the four-way controller (3) twice  
and proceed to Step 9 if [Hometown]  
does not have to be adjusted.  
New York  
Text Size  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
2
3
4
5
Press the four-way controller (3).  
The cursor moves to W.  
Press the four-way controller (5) and use the four-way  
controller (45) to select the city.  
Press the four-way controller (3).  
The cursor moves to DST (daylight saving time).  
6
7
Use the four-way controller (45) to select  
O
(On) or  
P
(Off).  
Press the 4 button.  
The camera returns to the [Initial Setting] screen.  
8
9
Press the four-way controller (3).  
The cursor moves to [Text Size].  
Press the four-way controller  
Initial Setting  
Language  
(5) and use the four-way  
controller (23) to select [Std.]  
or [Large].  
English  
Std.  
New York  
Text Size  
Selecting [Large] magnifies the  
selected menu item.  
Large  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
10 Press the 4 button twice.  
The screen for setting the date and time will be displayed.  
In this manual, the menu screens hereafter are described with [Text Size] set  
to [Std.].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
47  
When an Incorrect Language is Set  
When you mistakenly select a language in the [Language/  
] screen,  
you can perform the following operations to set the correct language.  
1
Press the 3 button once or  
twice to display the guides  
(p.22) on the monitor.  
AF.S  
9
P
The screen shown on the right is an  
example of the guides displayed. The  
displayed screen will vary depending on  
the selected language.  
2
RAW  
AF  
RAW+  
P LINE  
2008/01 /001 00:00  
The guides appear on the monitor for 3  
seconds. (Capture mode)  
2
3
Press the 3 button once.  
A is displayed in the upper tab. ([A Rec. Mode] menu)  
Press the four-way controller (5) twice.  
R is displayed in the upper tab. ([R Set-up] menu)  
4
5
Use the four-way controller (3) to select [Language/  
in the bottom row.  
]
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The [Language/  
] screen appears.  
6
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select the  
desired language and press the 4 button.  
The [R Set-up] menu for the selected language appears.  
Refer to the following pages and set the desired city for [Hometown]  
and the current date and time as necessary.  
• To change Hometown: “Setting the World Time” (p.221)  
To change date and time:  
Style (p.220)  
Changing the Date and Time and the Display  
When [Hometown] and the date and time are not set, the [Initial Setting] or  
[Date Adjust] screen will be displayed when the camera is turned on again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
48  
Setting the Date and Time  
Set the current date and time and the display style.  
1
Press the four-way controller  
(5).  
Date Adjust  
Date Style  
mm/dd/yy 24h  
01 / 01 / 2008  
00 : 00  
2
The frame moves to [mm/dd/yy].  
Date  
Time  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to choose the date style.  
Press the four-way controller  
Date Adjust  
(5).  
Date Style  
Date  
mm/dd/yy 24h  
01 / 01 / 2008  
00 : 00  
The frame moves to [24h].  
Time  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
4
5
Use the four-way controller (23) to select 24h (24-hour  
display) or 12h (12-hour display).  
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The frame returns to [Date Style].  
6
Press the four-way controller (3).  
The frame moves to [Date].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
49  
7
Press the four-way controller  
(5).  
Date Adjust  
Date Style  
mm/dd/yy 24h  
01 / 01 / 2008  
00 : 00  
The frame moves to the month.  
Date  
Time  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
2
8
9
Use the four-way controller (23) to set the month.  
Set the day and year in the same manner.  
Next, set the time.  
If you select [12h] in Step 4, the setting switches between am and pm  
depending on the time.  
Press the 4 button.  
The camera is ready to take a picture. If you set the date and time with  
the menu operations, the screen will return to the [R Set-up] menu.  
Press the 4 button again.  
Pressing the 3 button while adjusting the date cancels the settings made  
so far and switches the camera to Capture mode. If the power is turned on  
without the date and time set, the Date Adjust screen is displayed if Initial  
Setting has been performed. You can also set the date later by menu  
operations. (p.220)  
• When you finish the settings and press the 4 button, the camera clock is  
reset to 00 seconds. To set the exact time, press the 4 button when the  
time signal (on the TV, radio, etc.) reaches 00 seconds.  
• You can change the language and date and time settings with the menu  
operations. (p.220, p.224)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
50  
Attaching the Lens  
All camera exposure modes are available when using DA, D FA, FA J or  
other lenses with an Aperture s(Auto) position. Some functions are  
restricted when lenses are not set to the Aperture sposition. Also see  
“Notes on [36. Using Aperture Ring]” (p.251). Other lenses and  
accessories will not be available with factory default settings. To allow  
shutter release with lenses or accessories not listed above, set [36. Using  
aperture ring] in the [A Custom Settings] menu. (p.75)  
2
Turn the camera off before attaching or removing the lens to prevent  
unexpected lens movement.  
1
Check that the camera is turned off.  
2
Remove the body mount cover  
(1) and lens mount cover (2).  
Be sure to put the lens down with the  
lens mount side facing upward to  
protect the lens mount from damage  
after removal.  
3
Align the red dots on the  
camera and the lens, and  
secure by turning the lens  
clockwise until it clicks.  
After attaching, turn the lens  
counterclockwise to check that the lens  
is locked in place.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
51  
4
Remove the front lens cap by  
pushing the indicated portions  
inward.  
2
To detach the lens, hold down the lens  
unlock button (3) and turn the lens  
counterclockwise.  
3
• The body mount cover (1) is a cover to prevent scratches and block dust  
when shipped. Body Mount Cap K is sold separately and has a lock function.  
• We assume no responsibility nor liability for accidents, damages and  
malfunctions resulting from the use of lenses made by other manufacturers.  
• The camera body and lens mount incorporate lens information contacts and  
an AF coupler. Dirt, dust, or corrosion may damage the electrical system.  
When necessary, clean the contacts with a soft dry cloth.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
52  
Adjusting the Viewfinder Diopter  
Adjust the viewfinder to suit your eyesight.  
If it is difficult to see the viewfinder image clearly, slide the diopter  
adjustment lever sideways.  
-1  
-1  
You can adjust the diopter from approximately –2.5m to +1.5m .  
2
1
Look through the viewfinder and  
point the camera at a white wall  
or other bright and consistent  
surface. Slide the diopter  
adjustment lever left or right.  
Adjust the lever until the AF frame in  
the viewfinder is focused.  
AF frame  
• The FP Eyecup is attached to the  
viewfinder portion when camera leaves  
the factory. Diopter adjustment is available  
with the FP Eyecup attached. However,  
adjustment is easier with the eyecup  
removed. To remove the FP Eyecup, press  
in one side and pull it out in the direction of  
the arrow.  
To attach the FP Eyecup, align it with the  
groove on the viewfinder eyepiece and  
push it into position.  
• If it is difficult to see the viewfinder image clearly even if you set the diopter  
adjustment lever, use the diopter correction lens adapter M. However, the  
eyecup must be removed to use this adapter. (p.258)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Basic Operations  
This chapter explains basic operations for shooting by  
setting mode dial to Green mode (automatic exposure  
according to the Normal program line) to ensure successful  
capturing.  
For information about advanced functions and settings for  
taking pictures, refer to chapter 4 and onward.  
Basic Shooting Operation ...................................54  
Using a Zoom Lens ..............................................59  
Using the Built-in Flash .......................................60  
Taking Pictures Using the Shake Reduction  
Function ................................................................65  
Playing Back Still Pictures ..................................68  
Deleting Images ....................................................70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
54  
Basic Shooting Operation  
Holding the Camera  
How you hold the camera is important when taking pictures.  
• Hold the camera firmly with both hands.  
• Press the shutter release button gently when taking a picture.  
3
Horizontal position  
Vertical position  
• To reduce camera shake, support your body or the camera on a solid object  
such as a table, tree, or wall.  
• Although there are individual differences among photographers, the shutter  
speed for a handheld camera is generally 1/(focal length ×1.5). For example,  
it is 1/75 of a second for a focal length of 50 mm and 1/150 of a second for  
100 mm. Use a tripod or the Shake Reduction function (p.65) when using a  
lower shutter speed.  
• When using a telephoto lens, a tripod that is heavier than the total weight of  
the camera and lens is recommended to avoid camera shake.  
• Do not use the Shake Reduction function when using the camera on a tripod.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
55  
Letting the Camera Choose the Optimal  
Settings  
The u features various Capture modes, Focus modes, and Drive  
modes suited for your intentions. This section explains how to take  
pictures by simply pressing the shutter release button.  
1
Set the mode dial to B.  
The Exposure mode changes to B  
(Green) mode. In B, proper  
3
exposure is determined by the  
camera and the shutter speed and  
aperture are automatically set. (p.83)  
2
Set the focus mode lever to  
l
.
The Focus mode changes to l  
(Autofocus/Single) mode. In l, the  
lens automatically focuses when the  
shutter release button is pressed  
halfway. When the image is focused,  
the shutter can be released. (p.104)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
56  
3
4
Look through the viewfinder to  
view the subject.  
A zoom lens can be used to change the  
size of the subject in the viewfinder.  
1Using a Zoom Lens (p.59)  
Position the subject inside the  
AF frame and press the shutter  
release button halfway.  
3
The autofocus system operates. The  
focus indicator ] appears in the  
viewfinder when the subject comes into  
focus.  
The flash does not pop up automatically.  
If the flash is necessary, the flash status  
E blinks. Press the K button (p.63) to  
pop up the flash manually.  
1Operating the shutter release button  
(p.57)  
1Subjects that are Difficult to Focus on  
(p.58)  
Flash  
status  
Focus indicator  
1Using the Built-in Flash (p.60)  
1Selecting the Focusing Area (AF Point)  
(p.107)  
You can preview the image in the monitor and check the composition,  
exposure, and focus before taking the picture. (p.113)  
5
Press the shutter release  
button fully.  
The picture is taken.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
57  
6
Review the captured image on  
the monitor.  
Image appears for 1 second on the  
monitor after capturing (Instant Review).  
You can magnify the image during  
Instant Review with the rear e-dial.  
(p.174)  
You can delete the image during Instant  
Review by pressing the  
i
button.  
1Setting the Instant Review (p.227)  
1Deleting Images (p.70)  
3
1Bright/Dark Area Display (p.227)  
1Histogram Display (p.227)  
Delete  
Operating the shutter release button  
The shutter release button has two working positions.  
Not pressed Pressed halfway Pressed fully  
(first position) (second position)  
Pressing it down halfway (first position) turns on the viewfinder and  
LCD panel indicators and the autofocus system operates. Pressing it  
fully (second position) takes the picture.  
• Press the shutter release button gently when taking a picture to prevent  
camera shake.  
• Practice pressing the shutter release button halfway to learn where the  
first position is.  
• The viewfinder indicators stay on while shutter release button is  
pressed halfway. The indications stay on for about 10 seconds (default  
setting) while the exposure metering timer is on after the button is  
released. (p.27, p.99)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
58  
Subjects that are Difficult to Focus on  
The autofocus mechanism is not perfect. Focusing may be difficult when  
taking pictures under the following conditions ((a) to (f) below). These also  
apply to manual focusing using the focus indicator ] in the viewfinder.  
If the subject cannot be focused automatically, set the focus mode lever to  
\ and use the manual focus mode to focus on the subject with the aid  
of the matte field in the viewfinder. (p.111)  
(a) Extremely low-contrast subjects such as a white wall in the  
focusing area.  
(b) Subjects which do not reflect much light within the focusing area.  
(c) Fast moving objects.  
3
(d) Strongly reflected light or strong backlighting (bright background).  
(e) If repeating vertical or horizontal line patterns appear within the  
focusing area.  
(f) Multiple subjects in the foreground and background within the  
focusing area.  
Subject may not be focused even when ](focus indicator) is displayed when  
(f) above applies.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
59  
Using a Zoom Lens  
Enlarge the subject (telephoto) or capture a wider area (wide angle) with  
a zoom lens. Adjust it to the desired size and take the picture.  
1
Turn the zoom ring to the right  
or left.  
Turn the zoom ring clockwise for  
telephoto and counterclockwise for  
wide angle.  
3
• The smaller the number of the displayed focal length, the wider the angle.  
The larger the number, the more magnified the image appears.  
• Power Zoom (Auto Zoom) is available if a Power Zoom compatible FA lens  
is used with this camera.  
Wide Angle  
Telephoto  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
60  
Using the Built-in Flash  
If you wish to discharge the flash in a dark or backlit location, press the  
K button to pop up the flash. Select a flash mode to suit your purpose  
from the Flash options screen in the Fn menu. You can adjust the flash  
output with the rear e-dial in any Exposure mode other than Green mode.  
The built-in flash is optimum at about 0.7 m to 5 m from the subject.  
Exposure will not be properly controlled and vignetting may occur when  
used at a distance closer than 0.7 m (this distance varies slightly  
depending on the lens being used and set sensitivity (p.141)).  
3
Compatibility of built-in flash and lens  
Vignetting (darkening of the corners of the image due to a lack of  
light) may occur depending on the lens being used and the capture  
conditions. We recommend taking a test shot to confirm this.  
1DA, D FA, FA J, FA and F Lens Compatibility with the Built-in Flash  
(p.142)  
• When using the built-in flash, remove the lens hood before shooting.  
• The built-in flash fully discharges for lenses without a function to set  
aperture lens ring to s(Auto).  
Discharges the flash automatically in dark or backlit  
Auto discharge  
C
locations.  
Auto flash+  
Redeye reduct  
Lights a red-eye reduction light before automatic flash.  
D
E
Flash On  
Discharges the flash each time.  
Flash On+  
Red-eye  
Lights a red-eye reduction light before discharging the  
flash with Flash On.  
F
Sets the shutter speed slower depending on the  
brightness. Use this when shooting a portrait in front of  
a sunset or other scenery to capture both the person  
and background clearly.  
Slow-speed sync  
G
Slow-speed sync+ Lights a red-eye reduction light before discharging the  
H
Red-eye  
flash with Slow-speed sync.  
Discharges flash immediately before closing the  
shutter curtain. Capture moving images as if they are  
leaving a trail behind.  
Trailing curtain  
sync  
I
k
You can synchronize a dedicated external flash  
(AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ) without using a sync cord.  
Wireless Mode  
r
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
61  
When using Slow-speed sync or Slow-speed sync+Red-eye, the shutter speed  
becomes slower depending on the brightness. Use Shake Reduction (p.65) or  
fix the camera on a tripod to prevent camera shake.  
Selecting Flash Mode  
1
Press the { button.  
3
The Fn menu appears.  
CUSTOM IMAGE  
Fn  
OK  
AUTO  
Fn  
Exit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
62  
2
Press the four-way controller (3).  
The Flash options screen appears.  
Flash Mode  
Flash On  
3
OK  
OK  
0.0  
• When the mode dial is set to B, C and D can be selected, when set to  
b, L, aor p, you can select E, F, k and r, and when set to M,  
you can select E, F and r. For any other mode, E, F, G, H, I and  
r can be selected.  
• When the mode dial is set to A, the available flash modes vary depending  
on the settings that have been saved.  
3
4
Use the four-way controller (45) to choose a flash mode.  
When not in B (Green) mode, turn the rear e-dial to perform Flash  
exposure compensation. (p.136)  
Press the 4 button.  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
63  
Using Built-in Flash  
1
Press the K button.  
The built-in flash pops up and begins  
charging. When the flash is fully charged,  
E appears in the LCD panel and  
viewfinder.  
(p.27, p.29)  
3
2
3
Press the shutter release button halfway.  
The focus indicator ] appears in the viewfinder when focused.  
Press the shutter release button fully.  
The picture is taken.  
• When the mode dial is at B, the flash is not discharged when the lighting  
conditions do not require flash for correction even if the flash is popped up.  
• The Flash On is used when the flash is popped up if the mode dial is at a  
setting other than B.  
4
Push down on the portion  
indicated in the illustration to  
retract the flash.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
64  
Using Red-eye Reduction Flash  
“Red-eye” is the phenomenon where eyes look reddish in photographs  
taken in dark environments with a flash. This is caused by the reflection of  
the electronic flash in the retina of the eye. Red-eye occurs because pupils  
are dilated in dark environments.  
This phenomenon cannot be averted but the following measures can be  
used to combat it.  
• Brighten the surroundings when shooting.  
• Set to wide angle and shoot from closer if a zoom lens is in use.  
• Use a flash that supports red-eye reduction.  
• Position the flash as far away from the camera as possible when using  
an external flash.  
3
The red-eye reduction function on this camera reduces red-eye by  
discharging the flash twice. With the red-eye reduction function, the pre-  
flash is discharged just before the shutter is released. This reduces pupil  
dilation. The main flash is then discharged while the pupils are smaller,  
reducing the red-eye effect. To use the red-eye reduction function, set  
(Auto flash+Redeye reduct) in Green mode, or (Flash On+Red-eye) or  
(Slow-speed sync+Red-eye) in other modes for Flash mode.  
D
F
H
Daylight-Sync Shooting  
In daylight conditions, the flash will eliminate shadows when a portrait  
picture is taken with a person’s face cast in shadow. Use of the flash in this  
way is called Daylight-Sync Shooting. Flash On is used when shooting  
with Daylight-Sync Shooting.  
 Taking pictures (Hyper-program)  
1 Pop up the flash manually and confirm that the flash mode is set to E  
(Flash On). (p.63)  
2 Confirm that the flash is fully charged.  
3 Take the picture.  
The picture may be overexposed if the background is too bright.  
Without Daylight-Sync  
With Daylight-Sync  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
65  
Taking Pictures Using the Shake  
Reduction Function  
You can easily take sharp pictures using the Shake Reduction function by  
simply turning on the Shake Reduction switch.  
Shake Reduction  
The Shake Reduction function reduces camera shake that occurs  
when the shutter release button is pressed. This is useful for taking  
pictures in situations where camera shake is likely to occur. The Shake  
Reduction function allows you to take pictures at approximately 4 steps  
slower shutter speed without the risk of the camera shake.  
The Shake Reduction function is ideal when taking pictures in the  
following situations.  
3
• When taking pictures in dimly lit locations, such as indoors, at night,  
on cloudy days and in the shade  
• When taking telephoto pictures  
Picture taken with  
the Shake Reduction function  
Blurred picture  
The Shake Reduction function does not compensate for blurring caused by movement  
of the subject. To take pictures of a moving subject, increase the shutter speed.  
The Shake Reduction function may not fully reduce camera shake when  
taking close-up shots. In this case, it is recommended that the Shake  
Reduction function be turned off and the camera be used with a tripod.  
• The Shake Reduction function will not fully work when shooting with a  
slower shutter speed, for example when shooting a moving subject or  
night scenes. In this case, it is recommended that the Shake Reduction  
function be turned off and the camera be used with a tripod.  
Shake Reduction Function and Lens Focal Length  
The Shake Reduction function operates by acquiring the lens information  
such as focal length.  
If the camera uses a DA, D FA, FA J, FA or F lens, the lens information is  
automatically acquired when the Shake Reduction function is activated.  
[Focal Length] cannot be set from [Input Focal Length] menu in the [  
A
Rec. Mode] (The menu items cannot be selected).  
If another type of lens is used, the lens information cannot be automatically  
acquired even when the Shake Reduction function is activated.  
In this case, the [Input Focal Length] setting menu appears. Set [Focal  
Length] manually on the [Input Focal Length] setting menu.  
Shake Reduction Function (p.67)  
1
Setting the  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
66  
Turning On the Shake Reduction Function  
1
Turn on the Shake Reduction  
switch.  
When the shutter release button is  
pressed halfway, k appears in the  
viewfinder and the Shake Reduction  
function turns on.  
3
• Be sure to turn off the Shake Reduction switch when using the camera with  
a tripod.  
• The Shake Reduction function automatically turns off in the following  
situations.  
When using self-timer, 2 sec. self-timer, remote control shooting, 3 sec. delay  
shooting, bulb shooting, or wireless mode with an external flash  
• If a type of lens that does not support automatic acquisition of lens  
information such as focal length is used (p.65), the [Input Focal Length] menu  
appears. Set [Focal Length] manually on the [Input Focal Length] setting  
menu. 1Setting the Shake Reduction Function (p.67)  
• Turn the Shake Reduction switch off if you will not use the Shake Reduction  
function.  
• The Shake Reduction function will not fully work (for about 2 seconds) right  
after turning on the camera or restoring from Auto Power Off. Wait for the  
Shake Reduction function to become stable before gently pressing the  
shutter release button to take a picture. Press the shutter release button  
halfway. The camera is ready to take pictures when k appears in the  
viewfinder.  
• Shake Reduction is available with any u compatible PENTAX lens.  
However, when the aperture ring is set at other than the s(Auto) position or  
a lens without an sposition is used, the camera does not operate unless [36.  
Using aperture ring] is set to [Permitted] in the [A Custom Setting] menu (see  
p.75; see p.30 - p.31 for operation method). Set this beforehand. Note that  
some functions are restricted when [36. Using aperture ring] is set to  
[Permitted] in the [A Custom Setting] menu. Refer to “Notes on [36. Using  
Aperture Ring]” (p.251) for details.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
67  
Setting the Shake Reduction Function  
The [Input Focal Length] setting menu appears when the camera is turned  
on with the Shake Reduction switch on and a type of lens that does not  
support automatic acquisition of lens information such as focal length  
(p.65) is mounted.  
Set [Focal Length] manually on the [Input Focal Length] setting menu.  
• The [Input Focal Length] setting menu does not appear when using a lens  
that supports automatic acquisition of lens information such as focal length  
because [Focal Length] is set automatically.  
3
• When using a lens without the sposition on the aperture or with the aperture  
set to a position other than the sposition, set [36. Using aperture ring] on  
the [A Custom Setting] menu to [Permitted].  
1
Use the four-way controller  
(45) or the rear e-dial to set  
[Focal Length].  
Input Focal Length  
Focal Length  
100  
135  
120  
Select from the following 34 focal length  
values. (The default setting is 35.)  
8
10 12 15 18 20 24 28 30 35  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
40 45 50 55 65 70 75 85 100 120  
135 150 180 200 250 300 350 400 450 500  
550 600 700 800  
• If the focal length for your lens is not listed above, select the value closest to  
the actual focal length (example: [18] for 17 mm and [100] for 105 mm).  
• When using a zoom lens, select the actual focal length at the zoom setting in  
the same manner.  
• Effect of Shake Reduction is influenced by the shooting distance as well as  
focal length information. The Shake Reduction function may not perform as  
expected when shooting at close ranges.  
2
Press the 4 button.  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
To change the [Focal Length] setting, use [Input Focal Length] on the [ARec.  
Mode] menu. (p.72)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
68  
Playing Back Still Pictures  
Playing Back Images  
You can play back captured still pictures with the camera.  
Use the included “PENTAX PHOTO Browser 3” software to play back using a  
PC. Refer to the “PENTAX PHOTO Browser 3/PENTAX PHOTO Laboratory 3  
Operating Manual” for details.  
3
1
Press the Q button after  
taking a picture.  
The most recently captured image  
(image with the largest file number) is  
displayed on the monitor.  
Press the  
M
button during  
playback to display information such as  
the image data for the displayed image.  
Refer to p.25 - p.26 for display  
information details.  
100-0001  
100-0001  
M
1/2000  
F2.8  
RGB  
Standard display  
Histogram display  
M
M
100-0001  
Av  
AF.S  
M
24mm  
g
1/2000  
F2.8  
+1.5  
-
0.5  
0
ISO 200 10000K G2 A1  
JPEG AdobeRGB  
0
0
0
14.6  
02 / 02 / 2008 10 : 39AM  
No info. Display  
Detailed information display  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
69  
2
Press the four-way controller  
(45).  
4: The previous image appears.  
5: The next image appears.  
• You can display the next or previous image by turning the front e-dial.  
• Refer to “Playback Functions” (p.169) for playback mode details.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
70  
Deleting Images  
Deleting a Single Image  
You can delete one image at a time.  
• Deleted images cannot be restored.  
• Protected images cannot be deleted.  
3
1
Press the  
to select an image to delete.  
Q
button and use the four-way controller (45)  
2
Press the i button.  
The Delete screen appears.  
3
4
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select [Delete].  
100-0046  
Select the file format to delete for  
images saved in RAW+ format.  
Delete  
Cancel  
Delete JPEG Deletes only the JPEG image.  
OK  
All images  
OK  
Delete RAW  
Deletes only the RAW image.  
Deletes both file formats.  
Delete  
RAW+JPEG  
Press the 4 button.  
The image is deleted.  
When deleting multiple images, refer to “Deleting Multiple Images” (p.185).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Shooting Functions  
This chapter describes the various basic and advanced  
shooting functions available with the u.  
How to Operate the Shooting Menus .................72  
Setting the Exposure ...........................................76  
Focusing .............................................................104  
Checking the Composition, Exposure and Focus  
Before Shooting .................................................113  
Continuous Shooting .........................................117  
Interval Shooting ................................................120  
Self-Timer Shooting ...........................................122  
Remote Control Shooting (Remote Control F: Sold  
Separately) ..........................................................125  
Using Mirror Up Function to Prevent Camera  
Shake ...................................................................128  
Changing the Shooting Conditions Automatically  
when Shooting (Auto Bracket) ..........................129  
Storing User Settings .........................................133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
72  
How to Operate the Shooting Menus  
Press the 3 button in Capture mode. The [A Rec. Mode] menu  
appears.  
[A Rec. Mode] Menu Setting Items  
Perform settings related to capturing in the [ARec. Mode] menu.  
Item  
Function  
Sets the Exposure mode.  
* Appears only when the mode dial is set to  
Page  
p.133  
Exposure Mode  
A.  
4
JPEG Recorded  
Pixels  
Sets the recording size of images for JPEG  
shooting.  
p.156  
JPEG Quality  
File Format  
Sets the image quality for JPEG shooting.  
Sets the file format.  
p.157  
p.158  
p.158  
p.131  
p.103  
p.120  
p.167  
p.159  
RAW file format  
Extended Bracket  
Multi-exposure  
Interval Shooting  
Color Space  
Sets the file format for RAW shooting.  
Sets Extended Bracket shooting.  
Sets Multi-exposure shooting.  
Sets interval shooting.  
Sets the color space to use.  
Sets the | button function.  
RAW button  
Sets the settings to save when the power is  
turned off.  
Memory  
p.236  
Sets the [Focal Length] when using a lens for  
which focal length information cannot be  
acquired.  
Input Focal Length  
p.67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
73  
[A Custom Setting] Menu Setting Items  
Set custom functions to fully use the functions of a SLR camera with the  
Custom Setting Menu. The default setting does not change custom  
function.  
The [A Custom Setting] menu settings are activated when [Setting], the  
first item, is O(On).  
Item  
Function  
Page  
-
Setting  
Sets to change custom function.  
Set the type of Program line.  
1. Program Line  
2. EV Steps  
p.82  
p.101  
p.78  
Sets the adjustment steps for exposure.  
Sets the adjustment steps for ISO sensitivity.  
3. Sensitivity Steps  
4
Sets whether to increase the upper sensitivity  
limit to ISO 6400.  
4. Expand sensitivity  
p.78  
p.99  
5. Meter Operating  
Time  
Sets the exposure metering time.  
6. AE-L with AF  
locked  
Sets whether to lock exposure value when focus  
is locked.  
p.110  
p.99  
7. Link AF Point and Sets whether to link the exposure and AF point in  
AE  
the focusing area during multi-segment metering.  
8. One-Push  
Bracketing  
Sets whether to shoot all frames with one release  
when using Exposure Bracket.  
p.130  
p.129  
-
9. Auto Bracketing order Sets the order for bracket shooting.  
10. Auto EV  
Compensation  
Sets whether to compensate automatically when  
proper exposure cannot be determined.  
11. WB when using Sets whether to fix white balance when flash is  
p.161  
flash  
discharged.  
Sets whether to automatically fine-tune the white  
balance when specifying the light source on the p.161  
White Balance setting.  
12. WB Adjustable  
Range  
Sets the operation for when the = button is  
pressed. When set to [Enable AF], AF is  
performed when the = button is pressed.  
When set to [Cancel AF], AF is not performed  
13. AF Button  
Function  
p.107,  
when the shutter release button is pressed  
p.112  
halfway while the = button is pressed.  
When set to [Center AF Point] with j(Select)  
set on the AF point switching dial, the AF point is  
set to the center when the = button is pressed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
74  
Item  
Function  
Page  
-
14. AF by Press  
Halfway  
Sets whether to perform AF when the shutter  
release button is pressed halfway.  
15. Superimpose AF Sets whether to display the selected AF point  
p.107  
Area  
(focus position) in the viewfinder.  
Sets whether to use Autofocus when shooting  
with remote control.  
Shutter releases after AF activates if shutter is  
released from remote control when set to [On].  
Shutter cannot be released until in focus.  
AF does not activate at shutter release from  
remote control when set to [Off].  
16. AF in remote  
control  
-
Sets whether to allow the camera to select when  
to reduce noise or to reduce noise only when  
shooting at slow shutter speeds.  
17. Slow Shutter  
Speed NR  
p.80  
p.80  
4
Sets whether to use Noise Reduction when  
shooting with a high ISO. Select from three  
levels.  
18. High-ISO Noise  
Reduction  
19. Color temp. steps Sets the adjustment steps for color temperature. p.165  
20. e-dial in Program Sets the e-dials in e (Hyper-program) mode.  
-
21. e-dial in K  
mode  
Sets the e-dials in K (Sensitivity Priority) mode.  
-
22. e-dial in bmode Sets the e-dials in b (Shutter Priority) mode.  
-
-
23. e-dial in cmode Sets the e-dials in c(Aperture Priority) mode.  
Sets the e-dials in L (Shutter and Aperture  
24. e-dial in L & a  
-
-
Priority) mode and a(Hyper-manual) mode.  
Sets the e-dials in p (Bulb) mode and M (Flash  
25. e-dial in p & M  
X-sync speed) mode.  
Selects the exposure adjustment method when  
26. Green button in  
L & a  
the Green button is pressed in L (Shutter and  
Aperture Priority) mode or a(Hyper-manual)  
mode.  
p.95  
27. Illuminate LCD  
panel  
Sets whether to illuminate the LCD panel.  
p.29  
28. Release when  
Charging  
Sets to release shutter while the built-in flash is  
charging.  
p.137  
p.146  
p.113  
29. Flash in Wireless Sets the built-in flash discharge method in  
Mode  
wireless mode.  
Sets Preview Method when the main switch is  
turned to the preview position (|).  
30. Preview Method  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
75  
Item  
31. Display  
Function  
Page  
-
Sets whether to switch the number of recordable  
images in the LCD panel and viewfinder to the  
sensitivity display.  
Sensitivity  
When set to [On], if the focus mode is set to l  
and a manual focus lens is attached, catch-in  
focus shooting is possible and the shutter is  
released automatically when the subject comes  
into focus.  
34. Catch-in focus  
35. AF Adjustment  
p.112  
Performs AF adjustment.  
p.106  
p.251  
36. Using aperture  
ring  
Sets to enable shutter release when lens  
aperture ring is set at other than s.  
Reset Custom  
Function  
Resets all the settings in the Custom Setting  
menu to the defaults.  
p.239  
4
Shooting Fn Menu Setting Items  
Press the { button in Capture mode. The  
CUSTOM IMAGE  
Fn  
Fn menu appears.  
OK  
AUTO  
Exit  
Fn  
Press the four-way controller (2345)  
or the 4 button to set the operation.  
Key or  
Button  
Item  
Function  
Page  
p.117,  
p.122,  
p.125  
Selects Continuousshooting, Self-timer  
or Remote control.  
Drive Mode  
Flash Mode  
2
Adjusts the method of flash discharge.  
Adjusts the color balance to match the  
p.61  
3
White Balance type of the light source illuminating the p.160  
subject.  
4
Sensitivity  
Sets the sensitivity.  
p.78  
5
Custom Image Sets image processing.  
p.154  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
76  
Setting the Exposure  
Effect of Aperture and Shutter Speed  
Correct exposure of the subject is determined by the combination of  
shutter speed and aperture setting. There are many correct combinations  
of shutter speed and aperture for a particular subject. Different  
combinations produce different effects.  
Effect of Shutter Speed  
The shutter speed determines the length of time that light is allowed to  
strike the CMOS sensor.  
4
 Using slower shutter speed  
If the subject is moving, the image will be  
blurred because the shutter is open  
longer.  
It is possible to enhance the effect of  
motion (rivers, waterfalls, waves, etc.) by  
intentionally using a slower shutter speed.  
 Using faster shutter speed  
Choosing a faster shutter speed will allow  
freezing the action of a moving subject.  
A faster shutter speed also helps  
preventing camera shake.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
77  
Effect of Aperture  
Adjust the amount of light hitting the CMOS sensor by changing the  
aperture.  
 Opening the aperture (reduce the aperture value)  
Objects closer and farther than the focused  
subject will be more out of focus. For  
instance, if you take a picture of a flower  
against a landscape with the aperture open,  
the landscape in front and behind the flower  
will be blurred, emphasizing only the flower.  
 Closing the aperture (increase the aperture value)  
4
The range in focus expands forward and  
backward. For instance, if you take a picture  
of a flower against a landscape with the  
aperture narrowed, the landscape in front  
and behind the flower will be in focus.  
Depth of Field  
When you focus on a portion of the subject, there is a range in which  
both objects closer and farther will also be in focus. This focused  
range is called the depth of field.  
• The depth of field for the u differs depending on the lens but  
compared to a 35 mm camera, the value is roughly one aperture  
setting lower (the focused range becomes narrower).  
• The wider the wide-angle lens, and the farther away the subject, the  
deeper the depth of field is (some zoom lenses do not have a scale  
for depth of field because of their designs).  
Depth of field  
Area of focus  
Shallow  
Narrow  
Deep  
Wide  
Open  
(Smaller value)  
Close  
(Larger value)  
Aperture  
Longer  
(Telephoto)  
Shorter  
(Wide-angle)  
Lens focal length  
Distance to the subject  
Near  
Far  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78  
Setting the Sensitivity  
You can set the sensitivity to suit the brightness of the surroundings.  
The sensitivity can be set to [AUTO] or within a sensitivity range equivalent  
to ISO 100 to 3200. The default setting is [AUTO].  
Set [Sensitivity] in the Fn menu. (p.75)  
AUTO  
100  
200  
Sensittivity  
400  
AUTO 100-400  
800  
1600  
3200  
Fn  
OK  
OK  
D-Range  
4
• [Sensitivity] in the Fn menu cannot be used to set the sensitivity when the  
exposure mode is set to K (Sensitivity Priority). Turn the rear e-dial in  
Capture mode to make the setting. (p.85)  
• Settings other than [AUTO] are not available in [Sensitivity] when the  
exposure mode is set to L (Shutter & Aperture Priority).  
• When the exposure mode is set to p(Bulb), the upper sensitivity limit is ISO  
1600.  
• The sensitivity range can be expanded to a range of ISO 100 to 6400 when  
[4. Expand sensitivity] in the [A Custom Setting] menu is set to [On].  
• Noise Reduction is set to [Strong] when shooting with a sensitivity of ISO  
3200 or higher, regardless of the [18. High-ISO Noise Reduction] setting  
(p.80) in the [A Custom Setting] menu.  
• Captured images can show more noise if a higher sensitivity is set.  
• You can set whether to lock the ISO sensitivity adjustment to increments of  
1 EV or to coordinate it with the EV Steps (p.101) in [3. Sensitivity Steps] in  
the [A Custom Setting] menu.  
Setting the Range of Automatic Correction in AUTO  
Set range to automatically correct sensitivity when Sensitivity is set to  
[AUTO]. The sensitivity is automatically corrected in the range of [ISO 100-  
400] by default.  
Turn the front or rear e-dial to set the range in [Sensitivity] in the Fn menu.  
Front e-dial  
Rear e-dial  
Sets the lower sensitivity limit.  
Sets the upper sensitivity limit.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
79  
When the exposure mode is set to a(Hyper-manual), p(Bulb) or M (Flash X-  
sync speed), the sensitivity cannot be set to [AUTO].  
Changing the Sensitivity in Capture Mode  
Press the 4 button in Capture mode. The set sensitivity is displayed on  
the LCD panel and in the viewfinder. Turn the front e-dial while pressing  
the 4 button to change the sensitivity.  
• You can set the sensitivity to ISO AUTO by pressing the Green button while  
pressing the 4 button when the exposure mode is set to e (Hyper-  
program), b(Shutter Priority), or c (Aperture Priority).  
• You can display the number of recordable images by pressing the 4 button  
when the exposure mode is set to K (Sensitivity Priority) or L (Shutter  
and Aperture Priority).  
4
Expanding the Dynamic Range  
Dynamic range is the ratio that indicates the light level expressed by the  
CMOS sensor pixels from bright areas to dark areas.  
By using the Expand Dynamic Range function, you can expand the light  
level expressed by the CMOS sensor pixels, making it more difficult for  
bright areas to occur in the image.  
Press the { button for the [Sensitivity] setting in the Fn menu to turn this  
function on or off.  
AUTO  
Sensittivity  
200  
400  
AUTO 200-400  
800  
D-Range  
1600  
3200  
200%  
Fn  
OK  
D-Range  
OK  
When the dynamic range is expanded, the sensitivity range is reduced to ISO  
200 to 3200.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
80  
Noise Reduction  
When you use a digital camera to shoot with a long exposure or high  
sensitivity setting, image noise (image roughness or unevenness)  
becomes noticeable.  
You can reduce image noise by using Noise Reduction. Images shot  
with Noise Reduction take longer to save.  
Set in [17. Slow Shutter Speed NR] or [18. High-ISO Noise  
Reduction] in the [A Custom Setting] menu.  
 Slow Shutter Speed NR  
Auto: The camera determines the conditions such as the shutter  
speed, sensitivity, and internal temperature, and automatically  
reduces noise as necessary.  
On: Reduces noise only when shooting at slow shutter speeds  
(under 0.3 seconds).  
4
 High-ISO Noise Reduction  
Select the level of noise reduction from [Off], [Weakest], [Weak], or  
[Strong] when shooting with a high-sensitivity setting.  
Changing the Exposure Mode  
This camera features the following nine exposure modes.  
Use the mode dial (p.32) to change the exposure mode. The settings  
available for each exposure mode are as follows.  
Change  
Shutter  
Speed  
Exposure  
Mode  
EV Com-  
pensation  
Change Sen-  
Aperture sitivity  
Description  
Page  
Automatically sets  
shutter speed and  
aperture to the proper  
exposure according to  
Program line when  
taking pictures.  
B
(Green)  
No  
No  
No  
Yes p.83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
81  
Change  
Shutter  
Speed  
Exposure  
Mode  
EV Com-  
pensation  
Change Sen-  
Aperture sitivity  
Description  
Page  
Automatically sets  
shutter speed and  
aperture to the proper  
exposure according to  
Program line when  
taking pictures. You  
e
(Hyper-  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes p.84  
program) can use the front and  
rear e-dials to easily  
switch between shutter  
priority and aperture  
priority.  
Automatically sets the  
shutter speed and  
(Sensitivity aperture to the proper  
K
Other  
than p.85  
Auto  
4
No  
No  
Priority)  
exposure according to  
the set sensitivity.  
Lets you set the  
desired shutter speed  
for expressing moving  
subjects.  
b
(Shutter  
Priority)  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
Yes p.87  
Yes p.89  
c
Lets you set aperture  
(Aperture for controlling the  
Yes  
Priority)  
depth of field.  
Automatically sets the  
sensitivity so that the  
manually set shutter  
L
(Shutter & speed and aperture will  
Aperture give the proper  
Auto  
p.91  
only  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Priority)  
exposure according to  
the brightness of the  
subject.  
Other  
than  
Auto  
p.93  
(upto  
ISO  
1600)  
Lets you set shutter  
speed and aperture to  
capture the picture with  
creative intent.  
a
(Hyper-  
manual)  
Yes*  
No  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Lets you capture  
images that require  
p (Bulb) slow shutter speeds  
such as fireworks and  
night scenes.  
Other  
than p.96  
Auto  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
82  
Change  
Shutter  
Speed  
Exposure  
Mode  
EV Com-  
pensation  
Change Sen-  
Aperture sitivity  
Description  
Page  
The shutter speed is  
locked at 1/180  
M
(Flash X-  
sync  
seconds. Use this  
when using an External  
flash that does not  
automatically change  
the shutter speed.  
Other  
Yes*  
No  
Yes  
than p.97  
Auto  
speed)  
* Refer to p.101 for details on EV compensation for a(Hyper-manual) and M (Flash X-sync  
speed).  
About Program Line  
4
In [1. Program Line] in the [A Custom Setting] menu, choose normal  
Program line or one of the following. In B and e, exposure is  
regulated according to the set Program line.  
Normal  
Normal program is the basic Program Automatic Exposure.  
Hi Speed (Hi- Hi-speed priority program is a Program Automatic  
speed priority) Exposure that prioritizes high shutter speeds.  
Depth (Depth- Depth-of-field priority program is a Program Automatic  
of-field priority) Exposure that prioritizes lower aperture.  
MTF priority program is a Program Automatic Exposure  
MTF (MTF  
priority)  
that prioritizes the best aperture settings for the attached  
lens and is effective when combined with a DA, D FA, FA,  
or FA J lens.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
83  
Using the B (Green) Mode  
Automatically sets shutter speed and aperture to the proper exposure  
according to Program line when taking pictures.  
1
Set the mode dial to B.  
4
2
Confirm the shutter speed and aperture in the viewfinder  
or on the LCD panel.  
Shutter speed, aperture, AE lock, EV compensation, Auto bracket, Multi-  
exposure, and Flash exposure compensation cannot be set in B (Green)  
mode.  
Set the aperture to the sposition while  
holding down the auto-lock button when  
using a lens with an aperture ring.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
84  
Using the e(Hyper-program) Mode  
Automatically sets shutter speed and aperture to the proper exposure  
according to Program line when taking pictures.  
Use the front e-dial and rear e-dial to change the shutter speed and  
aperture while maintaining the proper exposure (Hyper-program).  
1
Set the mode dial to e.  
4
2
Confirm the shutter speed  
and aperture in the  
viewfinder or on the LCD  
panel.  
• Set the aperture to the sposition while  
holding down the auto-lock button when  
using a lens with an aperture ring.  
• You can change the Program line to use.  
Set in [1. Program Line] in the [A Custom  
Setting] menu. (p.82)  
You can automatically correct the  
sensitivity if appropriate exposure cannot  
be set with the set criteria. Set [Sensitivity]  
to [AUTO] in the Fn menu. (p.78)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
85  
Hyper-program  
 To change the shutter speed  
You can switch to Shutter Priority automatic exposure by turning the  
front e-dial in e (Hyper-program) mode.  
You can only set the shutter speed to a value that will give a correct  
exposure with the aperture range of the lens being used.  
• If the brightness changes and the aperture value is outside the  
relative range, the aperture value will blink in the viewfinder and on  
the LCD panel.  
Press the Green button to return to Hyper-program automatic  
exposure.  
 To change the aperture  
4
You can switch to Aperture Priority automatic exposure by turning the  
rear e-dial in e(Hyper-program) mode.  
You can only set the aperture to a value that will give a correct  
exposure within the range of available shutter speeds.  
If the brightness changes and the shutter speed is outside the relative  
range, the shutter speed will blink in the viewfinder and on the LCD  
panel.  
Press the Green button to return to Hyper-program automatic  
exposure.  
Using the K (Sensitivity Priority) Mode  
You can set the sensitivity to suit the brightness of the subject.  
The shutter speed and aperture are automatically set according to the  
selected sensitivity to obtain the appropriate exposure.  
1
Set the mode dial to K.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
86  
2
Turn the rear e-dial and adjust  
the sensitivity.  
The shutter speed, aperture value and  
sensitivity are displayed in the  
viewfinder and on the LCD panel.  
• You can set the sensitivity to values equivalent to ISO 100 to 3200. [AUTO]  
is not available.  
• Turn the front e-dial while pressing the m button to change the EV  
compensation value. (p.100)  
4
Set the sensitivity in increments of 1/2 EV or 1/3 EV. Set in [2. EV Steps] in the  
Custom Setting] menu. (p.101)  
You cannot set the sensitivity in [Sensitivity] in the Fn menu.  
Set the aperture to the position while  
[
A
s
holding down the auto-lock button when  
using a lens with an aperture ring.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
87  
Using the b(Shutter Priority) Mode  
Lets you set the desired shutter speed for expressing moving subjects.  
When taking pictures of a fast moving subject, you can increase the  
shutter speed to make the subject look still or decrease the shutter speed  
to have the subject show movement.  
Aperture value is automatically set to give the appropriate exposure  
depending on the shutter speed.  
1Effect of Aperture and Shutter Speed (p.76)  
1
Set the mode dial to b.  
4
2
Turn the front e-dial and adjust  
the shutter speed.  
The shutter speed and aperture value  
are displayed in the viewfinder and on the  
LCD panel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
88  
• Turn the front e-dial while pressing the m button to change the EV  
compensation value. (p.100)  
• Set the shutter speed in increments of 1/2 EV or 1/3 EV. Set in [2. EV Steps]  
in the [A Custom Setting] menu. (p.101)  
• You can automatically correct the sensitivity if appropriate exposure cannot  
be set with the set criteria. Set [Sensitivity] to [AUTO] in the Fn menu. (p.78)  
• Set the aperture to the sposition while  
holding down the auto-lock button when  
using a lens with an aperture ring.  
4
Exposure Warning  
If the subject is too bright or too dark,  
the aperture value will blink in the  
viewfinder and on the LCD panel. If the  
subject is too bright, choose a faster  
shutter speed. If it is too dark, choose a slower shutter speed. When  
the aperture value indication stops blinking, you can take the picture  
with proper exposure.  
Use an ND (Neutral Density) filter if the subject is too bright.  
Use a flash if it is too dark.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
89  
Using the c(Aperture Priority) Mode  
Set aperture for controlling the depth of field. The depth of field is deeper  
and the front and back of the focused object is clear when aperture is set  
to a large value. The depth of field is shallower and the front and back of  
the focused object is blurred when aperture is set to a small value.  
Shutter speed is automatically set to appropriate exposure depending on  
the aperture value.  
1Effect of Aperture and Shutter Speed (p.76)  
1
Set the mode dial to c.  
4
2
Turn the rear e-dial and adjust  
the aperture value.  
The shutter speed and aperture value  
are displayed in the viewfinder and on  
the LCD panel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
90  
• Turn the front e-dial while pressing the m button to change the EV  
compensation value. (p.100)  
• Set the aperture value in increments of 1/2 EV or 1/3 EV. Set in [2. EV Steps]  
in the [A Custom Setting] menu. (p.101)  
• You can automatically correct the sensitivity if appropriate exposure cannot  
be set with the set criteria. Set [Sensitivity] to [AUTO] in the Fn menu. (p.78)  
• Set the aperture to the sposition while  
holding down the auto-lock button when  
using a lens with an aperture ring.  
4
Exposure Warning  
If the subject is too bright or too dark,  
the shutter speed will blink in the  
viewfinder and on the LCD panel. If the  
subject is too bright, set the aperture  
smaller (larger number), and when too dark, open the aperture further  
(smaller number). Once blinking stops, you can take the picture.  
Use an ND (Neutral Density) filter if the subject is too bright.  
Use a flash if it is too dark.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
91  
Using the L (Shutter & Aperture Priority) Mode  
You can set both the desired shutter speed and aperture to take the  
picture.  
Automatically sets the sensitivity so that the manually set shutter speed  
and aperture will give the proper exposure according to the brightness of  
the subject.  
1
Set the mode dial to L.  
4
2
3
Turn the front e-dial and adjust  
the shutter speed.  
Turn the rear e-dial and adjust  
the aperture value.  
The shutter speed, aperture value and  
sensitivity are displayed in the  
viewfinder and on the LCD panel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
92  
• Turn the front e-dial while pressing the m button to change the EV  
compensation value. (p.100)  
• Set the shutter speed and aperture values in increments of 1/2 EV or 1/3 EV.  
Set in [2. EV Steps] in the [A Custom Setting] menu. (p.101)  
• Settings other than [AUTO] are not available in [Sensitivity] in the Fn menu.  
• Set the aperture to the sposition while  
holding down the auto-lock button when  
using a lens with an aperture ring.  
4
Exposure Warning  
If the subject is too bright or too dark,  
the sensitivity display will blink in the  
viewfinder and on the LCD panel.  
Change the shutter speed and aperture. When the indication stops  
blinking, you can take the picture with proper exposure.  
Use an ND (Neutral Density) filter if the subject is too bright.  
Use a flash if it is too dark.  
About the Green Button  
The aperture and shutter speed are automatically adjusted to the appropriate  
exposure at that moment if the Green button is pressed in  
Aperture Priority) mode. You can choose from the following three adjustment  
methods in [26. Green button in ] in the [ Custom Setting] menu.  
L
(Shutter &  
L
&
a
A
The aperture and shutter speed are adjusted  
automatically.  
Program Line  
bShift  
1
2
3
The aperture is locked and the shutter speed is  
adjusted automatically.  
The shutter speed is locked and the aperture is  
adjusted automatically.  
cShift  
Shutter speed is adjusted to appropriate exposure according to lens  
aperture when lens aperture is not set to the s position.  
1 Notes on [36. Using Aperture Ring] (p.251)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
93  
Using a(Hyper-manual) Mode  
This mode is convenient for taking pictures using the same shutter speed  
and aperture setting combination or taking intentionally underexposed  
(darker) or over-exposed (brighter) photographs.  
1Effect of Aperture and Shutter Speed (p.76)  
1
Set the mode dial to a.  
4
2
Press the Green button.  
Automatically switches shutter speed  
and aperture to the proper exposure.  
Turn the front or rear e-dial to change  
the exposure to your liking and take a  
picture.  
Adjust the shutter speed with the front  
e-dial and aperture with the rear e-dial.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
94  
• When the sensitivity is set to [AUTO] and exposure mode is set to a(Hyper-  
manual) mode, the sensitivity is the lowest sensitivity set in “Setting the  
Range of Automatic Correction in AUTO” (p.78).  
• The viewfinder indicator blinks when the difference from appropriate  
exposure is over ±3.0.  
• Set the shutter speed and aperture values in increments of 1/2 EV or 1/3 EV.  
Set in [2. EV Steps] in the [A Custom Setting] menu. (p.101)  
• Set the aperture to the sposition while  
holding down the auto-lock button when  
using a lens with an aperture ring.  
4
EV Bar  
The EV bar appears in the LCD panel  
and viewfinder in a(Hyper-manual)  
mode. The appropriate exposure is set  
when V is in the middle of the EV bar. If  
it is towards –, it is underexposed. If it is  
towards +, it is overexposed. If the  
EV bar  
value exceeds the range of the EV bar, the “+” or “–” blinks.  
Exposure Warning  
If the subject is too bright or too dark,  
“+” or “–” in the EV bar will blink in the  
viewfinder and on the LCD panel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
95  
Combining with L  
Press the L button (p.102) to record the exposure value in  
Hyper-manual. If the shutter speed or aperture is then changed, the  
combination of shutter speed and aperture changes while exposure  
is retained.  
Example: If the shutter speed is 1/125 sec and aperture is F5.6 and  
is recorded with the L button, and the shutter speed is changed  
to 1/30 sec with the front e-dial, the aperture automatically changes  
to F11.  
4
About the Green Button  
The aperture and shutter speed are automatically adjusted to the  
appropriate exposure at that moment if the Green button is pressed  
in a(Hyper-manual) mode. You can choose from the following three  
adjustment methods in [26. Green button in L & a] in the [A  
Custom Setting] menu.  
The aperture and shutter speed are adjusted  
automatically.  
Program Line  
bShift  
1
2
3
The aperture is locked and the shutter speed is  
adjusted automatically.  
The shutter speed is locked and the aperture is  
adjusted automatically.  
cShift  
Shutter speed is adjusted to appropriate exposure according to lens  
aperture when lens aperture is not set to the s position.  
1Notes on [36. Using Aperture Ring] (p.251)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
96  
Using the p (Bulb) Mode  
This mode is useful for the long exposures required for shooting night  
scenes and fireworks.  
The shutter remains open as long as the shutter release button is kept  
pressed.  
1
Set the mode dial to p.  
4
• EV compensation, Continuous shooting and Exposure Bracket are not  
available in p (Bulb) mode.  
• The longer the exposure time, the greater noise in the captured image.  
• Turn the rear e-dial to adjust the aperture value.  
• Set the aperture value in increments of 1/2 EV or 1/3 EV. Set in [2. EV Steps]  
in the [A Custom Setting] menu. (p.101)  
• The Shake Reduction function is automatically turned off when exposure  
mode is set to p(Bulb) mode.  
• Use a sturdy tripod and the cable switch CS-205 (optional) to prevent camera  
shake when using p(Bulb) mode. Connect the cable switch to the cable  
switch terminal (p.17).  
• Bulb shooting is available when using the remote control shooting mode  
(p.125). The shutter remains open as long as the shutter release button of  
the optional remote control is held down.  
• When the sensitivity is set to [AUTO] and exposure mode is set to p(Bulb)  
mode, the sensitivity is the lowest sensitivity set in “Setting the Range of  
Automatic Correction in AUTO” (p.78).  
• When the exposure mode is set to p(Bulb), the upper sensitivity limit is ISO  
1600.  
• There is no limit on exposure time for Bulb shooting. However, we  
recommend using the AC adapter D-AC50 (optional) when shooting with a  
long exposure setting as the battery is used while the shutter remains open.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
97  
Using the M (Flash X-Sync Speed) Mode  
The shutter speed is locked at 1/180 seconds. Use this when using an  
External flash that does not automatically change the shutter speed.  
1
Set the mode dial to M.  
4
• Turn the rear e-dial to adjust the aperture value.  
• Press the Green button to retain the shutter speed at 1/180 sec and  
automatically adjust the aperture.  
• When the sensitivity is set to [AUTO] and exposure mode is set to M (Flash  
X-sync speed) mode, the sensitivity is the lowest sensitivity set in “Setting the  
Range of Automatic Correction in AUTO” (p.78).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
98  
Selecting the Metering Method  
Choose the part of the screen to use for measuring brightness and  
determining exposure. L(Multi-segment metering), M (Center-weighted  
metering) or N(Spot metering) mode can be selected. The factory default  
setting is L(Multi-segment metering).  
Segments the viewfinder in 16 parts, meters each  
portion and determines the appropriate exposure.  
Multi-segment  
L
M
N
Center-  
weighted  
Measures the entire viewfinder with an emphasis on the  
center and determines the exposure.  
Measures only the center of the viewfinder and  
determines exposure.  
Spot Metering  
4
Set with the metering mode lever. (p.19)  
Using the Multi-Segment Metering  
The scene in the viewfinder is metered in  
16 different zones as shown in the  
illustration when using the multi-segment  
metering. Even in backlit locations, this  
mode automatically determines what level  
of brightness is in which portion and  
automatically adjusts exposure.  
The center-weighted metering mode is automatically set even if you select the  
multi-segment metering mode when using a lens other than a DA, D FA, FA J,  
FA, F or A lens, or when lens aperture ring is set at other than s. (Can only be  
used if permission is set in [36. Using aperture ring] (p.75) in the [A Custom  
Setting] menu.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
99  
Linking AF Point and AE During Multi-Segment  
Metering  
In [7. Link AF Point and AE] (p.73) of the [A Custom Setting] menu,  
you can link the exposure and AF point in the focusing area during  
multi-segment metering. The default setting is [Off].  
Off  
On  
Exposure is set separately from AF point.  
Exposure is set in accordance with AF point.  
1
2
Using the Center-Weighted Metering  
4
Metering is weighted at the center of the screen.  
Use this metering when you want to compensate  
the exposure by experience, instead of leaving it  
to the camera. The illustration shows that  
sensitivity increases as the pattern height  
increases (center). This mode does not  
automatically compensate for backlit scenes.  
Using the Spot Metering  
With spot metering, brightness is measured  
only within a limited area at the center of the  
screen as shown in the illustration. You can  
use this in combination with the AE lock  
(p.102) when the subject is extremely small  
and proper exposure is difficult to obtain.  
Setting the Meter Operating Time  
Sets the exposure metering time in [5. Meter Operating Time] (p.73)  
in the [A Custom Setting] menu. The default setting is [10 sec].  
10 sec  
3 sec  
Sets exposure metering timer to 10 seconds.  
Sets exposure metering timer to 3 seconds.  
Sets exposure metering timer to 30 seconds.  
1
2
3
30 sec  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
100  
Adjusting the Exposure  
This allows you to deliberately overexpose (brighten) or under-expose  
(darken) your picture.  
Select 1/2 EV or 1/3 EV in [2. EV Steps] in the [A Custom Setting] menu.  
(p.101)  
You can adjust the EV Compensation from –3 to +3 (EV) in increments of 1/2  
EV or –2 to +2 (EV) in increments of 1/3 EV.  
1
Set the compensation with the  
front e-dial while the m button  
is pressed.  
4
m is displayed in the viewfinder and  
on the LCD panel during  
compensation.  
Compensation value  
Press the m button to confirm the  
compensation value.  
N is displayed when the flash  
exposure compensation (p.136) is  
set.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
101  
EV compensation is not available when the exposure mode is set to B  
(Green) or p (Bulb) mode.  
• The EV compensation cannot be canceled by turning the camera off or by  
setting any other exposure mode.  
• The EV compensation value is reset to 0 when the Green button is pressed  
while holding down the m button.  
EV Compensation for a(Hyper-manual) and M  
(Flash X-sync speed)  
For example, if the EV compensation value is set to +1.5 for aand  
M, an underexposure of 1.5EV is displayed on the EV bar. If you set  
the exposure value so that the V is displayed at the center of the EV  
bar, the image will be captured with the compensated value.  
4
Changing the Exposure Steps  
Set Exposure Steps in [2. EV Steps] in the [A Custom Setting] menu to  
increments of 1/2 EV or 1/3 EV.  
2. EV Steps  
1/2 EV Steps  
1/3 EV Steps  
Exposure setting steps  
are set to 1/2 EV  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
102  
Recording the Exposure Before Shooting (AE Lock)  
AE Lock is a function that memorizes the exposure prior to taking the  
picture. Use this when the subject is too small or backlit and a proper  
exposure setting cannot be obtained.  
1
Press the L button.  
The camera memorizes the exposure  
(brightness) at that instant.  
Press it again to unlock.  
4
@ is displayed in the viewfinder while the AE lock is engaged. (p.27)  
• The exposure remains locked as long as the L button is kept pressed or  
the shutter release button is kept pressed halfway. The exposure remains in  
memory for a period between 0.5× to 2× the metering timer after releasing  
the L button.  
• You will hear a beep when the L button is pressed. The beep can be  
turned off. (p.219)  
• AE lock is not available when the exposure mode is B (Green), p (Bulb) or  
M (Flash X-sync speed) mode.  
• The combination of shutter speed and aperture value changes depending on  
the zooming position even while the AE lock is engaged when using a zoom  
lens for which maximum aperture varies depending on the focal length.  
However, the exposure value does not change and the picture is taken at the  
brightness level set by the AE lock.  
• Exposure can be locked when focus is locked. Set in [6. AE-L with AF locked]  
in the [A Custom Setting] menu. (p.110)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
103  
Shooting in Multi-exposure Mode  
You can take multiple frames while creating a single picture.  
1
Select [Multi-exposure] in the [A  
Rec. Mode] menu and press the  
four-way controller (5).  
Multi-exposure  
Number of shots  
Auto EV Adjust  
Off  
The Multi-exposure screen appears.  
MENU  
4
2
Use the four-way controller (5) to select the number of shots.  
Use the four-way controller (23) to select from 2 to 9 shots.  
3
4
5
Press the 4 button.  
Use the four-way controller (3) to set Auto EV Adjust.  
Use the four-way controller (5) to set Auto EV Adjust to O  
(On) or P(Off).  
When O(On) is set, the exposure is adjusted automatically according to  
the number of shots.  
6
7
Press the 4 button twice.  
The camera returns to the Capture mode.  
Take the picture.  
The created picture is displayed in Instant Review each time the shutter  
release button is pressed. Press the  
i
button during Instant Review to  
discard pictures created to that point and create again from the first picture.  
The picture is saved when the set number of shots has been taken.  
• If the | button or 3 button is pressed, or the Exposure Bracket is set  
during Multi-exposure shooting, the pictures that have already been taken  
are saved and Multi-exposure is exited.  
Multi-exposure and Auto Bracket or Extended Bracket cannot be used together.  
The mode set last is used.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
104  
Focusing  
You can focus with the following methods.  
The camera is focused when the shutter release  
button is pressed halfway.  
Autofocus  
=
Manual focus  
Manually adjust the focus.  
\
Using the Autofocus  
You can also choose the autofocus mode from l(Single mode) where  
the shutter release button is pressed halfway to focus on the subject and  
the focus is locked at that position, and k (Continuous mode) where  
the subject is kept in focus by continuous adjustment while the shutter  
release button is pressed halfway. The factory default setting is l.  
4
1
Set the focus mode lever to  
l or k.  
When the shutter release button is pressed  
Single mode  
halfway to focus on the subject, the focus is  
locked at that position.  
l
k
The subject is kept in focus by continuous  
adjustment while the shutter release button  
Continuous mode is pressed halfway. Even if the subject is not  
in focus, the shutter can be released when  
the shutter release button is pressed fully.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
105  
2
Look through the viewfinder  
and press the shutter release  
button halfway.  
The focus indicator ] appears in the  
viewfinder when focused. (When  
blinking, the subject is not in focus.)  
1 Subjects that are Difficult to Focus  
on (p.58)  
4
Focus Indicator  
• The camera can be focused by pressing the = button as well as by  
pressing the shutter release button halfway.  
• In l(Single mode), the focus is locked (focus lock) while ]is lit. To focus  
on another subject, take your finger off the shutter release button first.  
• In k(Continuous mode) (p.104), focus is adjusted continuously, tracking  
the moving object as long as the shutter release button is kept pressed  
halfway.  
• The shutter cannot be released until the subject is in focus in l (Single  
mode) (p.104). If the subject is too close to the camera, move back and take  
the picture. Adjust the focus manually if it is difficult to focus on the subject  
(p.58). (p.110)  
• In l(Single mode), press the shutter release button halfway. The built-in  
flash will discharge automatically several times, enabling the autofocus to  
focus on the subject more easily if the subject is in a dark area and the built-  
in flash is available.  
• When the shutter release button is pressed halfway to focus and the subject  
is determined to be a moving object, the k automatically tracks the  
subject. The lens will automatically operate and continuously focus on the  
subject.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
106  
AF Adjustment  
You can adjust the AF focusing position with [35. AF Adjustment] in  
the [A Custom Setting] menu.  
Be sure to use AF Adjustment only when necessary. Care should  
be taken as adjusting the autofocus may make it difficult to  
capture images with the appropriate focus.  
• Any camera shake during test shooting for focus adjustment may make  
it difficult to obtain the accurate focusing position. Therefore, always  
use a tripod when taking test shots.  
1 Select [35. AF Adjustment] in the [A Custom Setting] menu and  
press the four-way controller (5).  
2 Press the four-way controller (23) to select [On] and press the  
four-way controller (5).  
4
The AF Adjustment screen appears.  
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Apply All] or [Apply One].  
Apply All Applies the same adjustment value to all lenses.  
The lens ID is displayed when obtained. Saves and applies  
Apply One  
an adjustment value for each lens type. (Up to 20 lens types)  
4 Press the four-way controller (5) and  
adjust the value with the rear e-dial or  
the four-way controller (45).  
35. AF Adjustment  
Apply All  
+5  
Apply One  
Unset  
Press the four-way controller (5)  
(rear e-dial y) to adjust the focus to a  
closer position and press the four-way  
controller (4) (rear e-dial f) to adjust  
the focus to a farther position.  
Reset  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
Save  
5 Press the 4 button.  
6 Press the 4 button.  
The camera returns to the Capture mode.  
7 Take a test picture.  
You can check the focusing position by enlarging the image during  
Live View (p.114) or Digital Preview (p.115).  
• Press the Green button in Step 4 to set the adjustment value to ±0.  
• If an adjustment value has been saved using Apply One and you press  
the 4 button with [Apply All] selected in Step 6, the Apply All value is  
used instead of the Apply One value.  
• To reset a saved adjustment value, select [Reset] on the AF  
Adjustment screen in Step 3. (p.241)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
107  
Selecting the Focusing Area (AF Point)  
Choose the part of the viewfinder to set focus to. The factory default  
setting is S (Auto).  
The selected AF point lights red in the viewfinder. (Superimpose AF Area)  
The camera selects the optimum AF point even if  
Auto  
S
j
U
the subject is not centered.  
Sets the focusing area to one of the eleven points  
in the AF area.  
Select  
Center  
Sets the focusing area to the center of the  
viewfinder.  
4
Set with the AF point switching dial. (p.19)  
• AF point is not displayed in the viewfinder when [Off] is selected for [15.  
Superimpose AF Area] in the [A Custom Setting] menu. (p.74)  
• When [Center AF Point] is selected in [13. = Button Function] in the [A  
Custom Setting] menu, the camera can be set to return the AF point to the  
center when j (Select) is set and the = button is pressed. (p.73)  
• The AF point is fixed to the center position regardless of this setting with  
lenses other than DA, D FA, FA J, FA or F lenses.  
Setting the Focus Position in the Viewfinder  
1
Select j (Select) with the AF  
point switching dial.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
108  
2
3
Look through the viewfinder  
and check the position of the  
subject.  
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select the desired  
AF point.  
The AF point lights red in the viewfinder (Superimpose AF Area) and you  
can check where you set the AF point.  
4
Fixing the Focus (Focus Lock)  
If the subject is outside the range of the focusing area, the camera cannot  
automatically focus on the subject. In this situation, set the focus mode  
lever to l (Single mode). You can aim the focusing area toward the  
subject, use focus lock and recompose the picture.  
1
Frame the desired composition  
for your picture in the  
viewfinder.  
Use focus lock function when the  
subject you wish to focus on is not  
inside the focusing area.  
(Example) The person is out of  
focus and the background is  
focused instead.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
109  
2
Center the subject to focus in  
the viewfinder and press the  
shutter release button halfway.  
The focus indicator ] appears and  
you will hear a beep when the subject  
comes into focus. (When blinking, the  
subject is not in focus.)  
3
4
Lock the focus.  
Keep the shutter release button pressed halfway. The focus will remain  
locked.  
4
Re-compose the picture while  
keeping the shutter release  
button pressed halfway.  
• The focus is locked while the focus indicator ]is lit.  
• Turning the zoom ring in focus lock mode may cause the subject to be out of  
focus.  
• The beep can be turned off. (p.219)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
110  
Locking Exposure when Focus is Locked  
Set [6. AE-L with AF locked] in the [A Custom Setting] menu (p.73) to lock  
the exposure value while focus is locked. Exposure is not locked by default  
during focus lock.  
Off  
On  
Exposure is not locked when focus is locked.  
Exposure is locked when focus is locked.  
1
2
6. AE-L with AF locked  
Off  
On  
4
AE is not locked  
when the focus  
is locked  
Adjusting the Focus Manually (Manual Focus)  
When you adjust the focus manually, you can either check with the focus  
indicator in the viewfinder or use the viewfinder matte field to adjust focus.  
Using the Focus Indicator  
The focus indicator ] appears when the subject is in focus even during  
manual focus.  
You can manually adjust the focus using the focus indicator ].  
1
Set the focus mode lever to  
\.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
111  
2
Look through the viewfinder,  
press the shutter release  
button halfway and turn the  
focusing ring.  
The focus indicator ] appears and  
you will hear a beep when the subject  
comes into focus.  
4
Focus Indicator  
• Focus manually using the matte field in the viewfinder when the subject is  
difficult to focus (p.58) and the focus indicator will not stay lit.  
• The beep can be turned off. (p.219)  
Using the Viewfinder Matte Field  
You can manually adjust the focus using the viewfinder matte field.  
1
Set the focus mode lever to  
\.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
112  
2
Look through the viewfinder  
and turn the focusing ring until  
the subject looks sharp on the  
focusing screen.  
Using the = Button  
The = button operates the autofocus  
mechanism in the same manner as when the  
shutter release button is pressed halfway.  
(Capturing is performed with the shutter  
release button.)  
4
When the subject is focused with the =  
button in l (Single mode), focus lock is  
activated while the button is pressed.  
The subject will continue to be focused (Autofocus activates) while the =  
button is pressed in k (Continuous mode).  
Shooting in Catch-in Focus Mode  
When [34. Catch-in focus] is set to On in the [A Custom Setting] menu, if  
the focus mode is set to l and one of the following types of lenses is  
attached, catch-in focus shooting is possible and the shutter is released  
automatically when the subject comes into focus.  
• Manual focus lens  
• DA or FA lens that has a = and \setting on the lens (the setting on  
the lens must also be set to \ before shooting)  
 How to Take Pictures  
1 Attach lens to the camera.  
2 Set the focus mode lever to l.  
3 Set focus on a position the subject will pass.  
4 Use the cable switch CS-205 and press the shutter release button fully.  
The shutter is released automatically when the subject comes into focus  
in the set position.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
113  
Checking the Composition, Exposure  
and Focus Before Shooting  
You can use the preview function to check the depth of field, composition,  
exposure and focus before taking a picture. There are 3 preview methods.  
Live View  
Displays a real-time image on the monitor.  
Optical Preview  
For checking the depth of field with the viewfinder.  
For checking the composition, exposure and focus in the  
monitor.  
Digital Preview  
Selecting the Preview Method  
4
Choose whether to use Live View, Optical Preview, or Digital Preview  
when the main switch is turned to the preview position (|).  
The default setting is Live View.  
Set in [30. Preview Method] in the [A Custom Setting] menu. (p.74)  
30. Preview Method  
Live View  
Optical Preview  
Digital Preview  
For checking composition  
and focus on the LCD  
monitor in real time  
While setting Multi-exposure (p.103), preview is Optical Preview regardless of  
the [30. Preview Method] setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
114  
Displaying the Preview  
Displaying the Live View  
1
Focus on the subject, and then  
turn the main switch to |.  
The mirror raises and a real-time image is  
displayed on the monitor. Turn the main  
switch to | again to exit Live View.  
Live View can be displayed for up to 3  
minutes.  
4
• If Live View is used in places where the camera may become hot, such as in  
direct sunlight, l (temperature warning) may appear on the monitor. Cancel  
Live View, as the internal temperature of the camera is rising.  
• If Live View is used even after l (temperature warning) appears, Live View  
may end before 3 minutes elapse. Normal shooting is possible even if Live  
View is ended.  
• Even when the main switch is turned to |, if the internal temperature of the  
camera is high, l (temperature warning) will appear on the monitor and Live  
View may not be possible.  
• When the focus mode is set to land the = button is pressed during  
Live View, the displayed image will disappear and AF will activate. Once  
focused, the image will be displayed in Live View again.  
• AF using the shutter release button is not available during Live View.  
• Aperture, shutter speed, sensitivity, EV compensation, and exposure bracket  
cannot be changed during Live View.  
• The aperture value and shutter speed are not displayed in the LCD panel or  
shooting information screen during Live View.  
• Live View is exited after 3 minutes elapse, or if the 3 button, { button,  
or Q button is pressed.  
• The grid and AF frame can be displayed during Live View. Set in [Live View]  
(p.228) in the [Q Playback] menu.  
• You can magnify the image during Live View with the rear e-dial. (p.174)  
• Shooting while holding the camera by hand and viewing the monitor can  
create camera shake. Use of a tripod is recommended.  
• Live View is not available when data is being saved to an SD Memory Card.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
115  
Displaying the Optical Preview  
1
Position the subject inside the  
AF frame and press the shutter  
release button halfway to focus  
on the subject.  
2
Turn the main switch to | while  
looking through the viewfinder.  
4
You can check the depth of field in the  
viewfinder while the main switch is on |.  
• No shooting information is displayed in the viewfinder, and the shutter cannot  
be released while the main switch is in the preview position (|).  
• You can check the depth of field in all exposure modes.  
Displaying the Digital Preview  
1
Focus on the subject, then  
compose the picture in the  
viewfinder and move the main  
switch to |.  
The icon (|) appears in the monitor  
during preview and you can check the  
composition, exposure and focus.  
Press the shutter release button halfway to end Digital Preview and start  
focusing.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
116  
• You can display the Bright/Dark area warning or histogram in Digital Preview.  
Set in [Digital Preview] (p.229) in the [Q Playback] menu.  
• The maximum display time for Digital Preview is 60 seconds.  
• You can magnify the image during Digital Preview with the rear e-dial. (p.174)  
• Press the { button during Digital Preview to save the preview image as a  
JPEG image. The image save confirmation screen appears. Select [Save as]  
and press the 4 button.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
117  
Continuous Shooting  
Pictures can be taken continuously while the shutter release button is held  
down.  
You can select from g (Continuous shooting (Hi)) and h (Continuous  
shooting (Lo)) for continuous shooting.  
When JPEG quality is set to X (Quality Level  
C), pictures are taken continuously at  
approximately 3 frames per second. Up to 38  
g Continuous shooting (Hi)  
frames can be shot in one sequence.  
When JPEG quality is set to  
X
(Quality Level  
C
), pictures are taken continuously at  
h Continuous shooting (Lo)  
approximately 2.3 frames per second. Pictures can be  
taken continuously until the SD Memory Card is full.  
4
1
Press the { button.  
CUSTOM IMAGE  
Fn  
The Fn menu appears.  
OK  
AUTO  
Fn  
Exit  
2
3
Press the four-way controller  
(2).  
The Drive Mode options screen appears.  
Drivee Mode  
Single frame sshooting  
OK  
OK  
Use the four-way controller  
(45) to select g.  
Drivee Mode  
Continnuous shhootinng (Hi)  
OK  
OK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
118  
4
5
Press the four-way controller (3) and use the four-way  
controller (45) to select g or h.  
Press the 4 button.  
The camera is ready to take pictures continuously.  
6
7
Press the shutter release button halfway.  
The autofocus system operates. The focus indicator ] appears in the  
viewfinder when focused.  
Press the shutter release button fully.  
4
Pictures are taken continuously while the shutter release button is fully  
pressed. Take your finger off the shutter release button to stop.  
• If the focus mode is set to l (Single mode), focus is locked on the first  
focus position and pictures are taken at the set interval.  
• Focusing is continuously active during continuous shooting when the focus  
mode is set to k (Continuous mode).  
• The shutter cannot be released until charging is complete when using the  
built-in flash. You can set the camera to enable shutter release before the  
built-in flash is ready in the [A Custom Setting] menu. (p.137)  
• You can also use the remote control for continuous shooting. (p.125)  
• Select a setting other than gh in the Drive Mode options screen to cancel  
continuous shooting. The setting is canceled when the camera is turned off if  
[Drive Mode] in [Memory] of the [A Rec. Mode] menu (p.236) is set to P  
(Off).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
119  
Burst Shooting  
You can take pictures continuously at approximately 21 frames per second.  
In this mode, images are saved with JPEG Quality set to Y (1536×1024)  
regardless of the save format setting (p.156). The JPEG Quality set in the  
[A Rec. Mode] menu is used.  
1
Press the { button.  
The Fn menu appears.  
2
Press the four-way controller (2)  
and use the four-way controller  
(45) to select j.  
4
Drivee Mode  
Burst SShooting  
OK  
OK  
3
4
Press the 4 button.  
The camera is ready to take pictures continuously.  
Press the shutter release button halfway.  
The autofocus system operates. The focus indicator ] appears in the  
viewfinder when focused.  
5
Press the shutter release button fully.  
Pictures are taken continuously while the shutter release button is fully  
pressed until the camera buffer memory is full (JPEG Quality C:  
maximum of approximately 115 pictures). The focus is locked during  
shooting.  
• The mirror raises during shooting and Instant Review is displayed  
continuously on the monitor.  
The flash is turned off and the  
|
button operation is unavailable in this mode.  
Multi-exposure and Auto Bracket are disabled in this mode.  
• Select a setting other than j in the Drive Mode options screen to cancel  
burst shooting. The setting is canceled when the camera is turned off if [Drive  
Mode] in [Memory] of [ARec. Mode] menu (p.236) is set to P(Off).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
120  
Interval Shooting  
During interval shooting, pictures are taken at a set interval from a set time.  
1
Select [Interval Shooting] in the [A Rec. Mode] menu.  
2
3
Press the four-way controller (5).  
Use the four-way controller (45)  
to select O (On).  
Interval Shooting  
Interval  
00 : 00 ’ 01 "  
img  
Now  
Number of Shots  
Start Trigger  
Start Time  
1
4
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
4
5
6
Use the four-way controller (3) to select [Interval].  
When taking two or more pictures, set the wait time until the next picture is taken.  
Use the four-way controller (45) to select the number of hours, minutes,  
and seconds, and press the four-way controller (23) to set the time.  
You can set up to 24 hours, 0 minutes, and 0 seconds.  
Use the four-way controller (3) to select [Number of Shots].  
Set the number of shots to be taken.  
Press the four-way controller (5) and use the four-way controller (23)  
to select the number of shots to be taken.  
You can select between 1 and 99 shots.  
Use the four-way controller (3) to select [Start Trigger].  
Set the time when the first picture is taken.  
Press the four-way controller (5) and use the four-way controller (45)  
to select [Now] or [Set Time].  
Now  
Shooting starts immediately.  
Shooting starts at the set time. Use the four-way controller  
(3) to select [Start Time], use the four-way controller  
(45) to select the time, and press the four-way controller  
(23) to set the start time.  
Set Time  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
121  
7
Press the 4 button.  
The camera is ready to take a series of interval pictures.  
8
9
Press the shutter release button halfway.  
The focus indicator ] appears when the subject is in focus.  
Press the shutter release button fully.  
When [Start Trigger] is set to [Now], the first picture is taken. When set  
to [Set Time], shooting starts at the set time.  
For shooting multiple pictures, pictures are taken at the interval set in  
Step 4.  
4
After the set number of pictures is taken, the camera returns to normal  
Capture mode.  
• The camera cannot be operated during interval shooting. To cancel interval  
shooting, press any button on the back of the camera or press the shutter  
release button and the 3 button to display the exit confirmation screen,  
and then use the four-way controller (23) to select [Exit] and press the 4  
button. You can also exit Interval shooting by turning the main switch off or  
turning the mode dial.  
• This function cannot be used together with Auto Bracket or Multi-exposure.  
• This function cannot be used during p(Bulb) mode. Bulb-timer shooting is  
available with the use of the provided PENTAX REMOTE Assistant 3 when  
the camera is connected to a PC.  
• The drive mode is set to [Single frame shooting] regardless of the drive mode  
setting.  
• If the subject is not in focus in l (Single mode) or if the [Interval] setting  
is too short and image processing cannot be completed before taking a  
picture, no picture may be taken.  
• Although each shot taken is displayed on the monitor with Instant Review,  
they cannot be enlarged or deleted.  
• The [Interval] setting is disabled when [Number of Shots] is set to [1].  
• Interval shooting is canceled when the SD Memory Card has no more  
available memory.  
• If Auto Power Off (p.233) turns the camera off during interval shooting, the  
camera automatically turns on again when the shooting time approaches.  
• It is recommended to use the AC adapter when using interval shooting over  
a long period of time.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
122  
Self-Timer Shooting  
This camera has two types of self-timers: g and Z.  
Shutter will be released after about 12 seconds. Use this mode to  
include the photographer in the picture.  
g
A mirror pops up immediately after shutter release button is pressed.  
Shutter is released after about 2 seconds. Use this mode to avoid  
camera shake when the shutter release button is pressed.  
Z
1
Mount the camera onto a tripod.  
4
2
3
Press the { button.  
CUSTOM IMAGE  
Fn  
The Fn menu appears.  
OK  
AUTO  
Fn  
Exit  
Press the four-way controller  
(2).  
The Drive Mode options screen appears.  
Drivee Mode  
Single frame sshooting  
OK  
OK  
4
Use the four-way controller (45) to select g.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
123  
5
Press the four-way controller (3)  
and use the four-way controller  
(45) to select g or Z.  
Drivee Mode  
Self-Timer (12 secs)  
OK  
OK  
6
7
Press the 4 button.  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
Confirm in the viewfinder that the  
subject you wish to shoot is  
properly framed and press the  
shutter release button halfway.  
4
The focus indicator ]appears when the  
subject is in focus.  
8
Press the shutter release button  
fully.  
For g, the front and back self-timer lamps  
start blinking slowly and blink rapidly 2  
seconds before the shutter is released.  
The beep is heard and the rate increases.  
The shutter will be released about 12  
seconds after the shutter release button  
is pressed fully.  
For Z, the shutter will be released about  
2 seconds after the shutter release button  
is pressed fully.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
124  
• The beep can be turned off (p.219).  
• Exposure may be affected if light enters the viewfinder. Attach the provided  
ME viewfinder cap or use the AE lock function (p.102). (To ignore the light  
entering the viewfinder, set the exposure mode to a(Hyper-manual) (p.93).)  
Removing the Eyecup FP  
Attaching the ME Viewfinder cap  
4
• Select a setting other than g or Z in the Drive Mode options screen to cancel  
self-timer shooting. The setting is canceled when the camera is turned off if  
[Drive Mode] in [Memory] of [A Rec. Mode] menu (p.236) is set to P(Off).  
• The Shake Reduction function is automatically turned off when g or Z is set.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
125  
Remote Control Shooting (Remote  
Control F: Sold Separately)  
The shutter can be released from a distance by using the optional remote  
control unit. You can select from h (remote control), i (3 sec. delayed  
release), or i (remote continuous shooting) for remote control shooting.  
The shutter will be released immediately after the shutter release button  
on the remote control unit is pressed.  
h
When the shutter release button on the remote control unit is pressed, the  
shutter is released after about 3 seconds.  
i
Continuous shooting starts when the shutter release button on the  
remote control unit is pressed. Press the shutter release button on the  
remote control unit again to exit continuous shooting.  
i
4
1
Mount the camera onto a tripod.  
2
Press the { button.  
CUSTOM IMAGE  
Fn  
The Fn menu appears.  
OK  
AUTO  
Fn  
Exit  
3
4
Press the four-way controller (2).  
The Drive Mode options screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller (45) to select h.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
126  
5
Press the four-way controller (3)  
and use the four-way controller  
(45) to select h, i, or i.  
Drivee Mode  
The self-timer lamp will blink to let you  
know that the camera is in remote control  
wait status.  
Remotte Conntrol Unit  
OK  
OK  
6
7
Press the 4 button.  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
Press the shutter release button halfway.  
4
The autofocus system operates. The focus indicator ] appears in the  
viewfinder when focused.  
You cannot focus with the remote control unit in default settings. Focus on the  
subject first before operating with the remote control. You can set [AF in remote  
control] to [On] in the [A Custom Setting] menu. (p.74)  
8
Point the remote control unit  
towards the remote control receiver  
on the front or back of the camera  
and press the shutter release button  
on the remote control.  
5 m  
The operating distance of the remote  
control unit is about 5 m from the front or  
back of the camera.  
5 m  
For h, the shutter will be released  
immediately after the shutter release  
button is pressed.  
For i, the shutter will be released in  
three seconds after the shutter release  
button is pressed.  
After the picture is taken, the self-timer lamp lights for 2 seconds and  
then returns to blinking.  
For i, continuous shooting starts immediately after the shutter release  
button is pressed. To exit continuous shooting, press the shutter release  
button on the remote control unit again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
127  
• Exposure may be affected if light enters the viewfinder. Attach the provided  
ME viewfinder cap or use the AE lock function (p.102). (To ignore the light  
entering the viewfinder, set the exposure mode to a(Hyper-manual) (p.93).)  
Removing the Eyecup FP  
Attaching the ME Viewfinder cap  
• Select a setting other than h, i or i in the Drive Mode options screen to  
stop the remote control operation after it has been activated. The setting is  
canceled when the camera is turned off if [Drive Mode] in [Memory] of [A  
Rec. Mode] menu (p.236) is set to P(Off).  
4
• The remote control may not operate in backlit conditions.  
• The remote control does not work while the flash is being charged.  
When using the built-in flash, raise the flash into position first.  
• The remote control unit battery can send a remote control signal about  
30,000 times. Contact PENTAX Service Center to replace the battery (this  
will involve a fee).  
• The Shake Reduction function is automatically turned off when h, i or i  
is set.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
128  
Using Mirror Up Function to Prevent  
Camera Shake  
Use the Mirror Up function if camera shake is evident even when cable  
switch (optional) or remote control unit (optional) is used with a tripod.  
When shooting with the 2 sec. Self-Timer, the mirror pops up and the  
shutter is released 2 seconds after you press it, thereby avoiding the  
vibration of the mirror.  
Follow the procedure below to take a picture with the Mirror Up function.  
1
Mount the camera onto a tripod.  
2
In the Drive Mode, select Z (2 sec. Self-Timer).  
4
1Self-Timer Shooting (p.122)  
3
4
Press the shutter release button halfway.  
The autofocus system operates. The focus indicator ] appears in the  
viewfinder when focused.  
Press the shutter release button fully.  
The mirror pops up and the picture is taken 2 seconds later. AE lock is  
enabled with the exposure value set immediately before the mirror goes  
up.  
The Shake Reduction function is automatically turned off when shooting with  
the 2 sec. Self-Timer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
129  
Changing the Shooting Conditions  
Automatically when Shooting (Auto Bracket)  
Shooting in Exposure Bracket Mode  
You can take continuous pictures with different exposure when the shutter  
release button is pressed. The first frame is exposed with no  
compensation, the second frame is underexposed (negative  
compensation) and the third is overexposed (positive compensation)  
(when the number of frames is set to [3]).  
4
Normal exposure  
You can set [9. Auto Bracketing order] in the [A Custom Setting] menu.  
Auto Bracketing order  
Underexposure  
Overexposure  
0 ´ ´ +, – ´ 0 ´ +, + ´ 0 ´ –, 0 ´ + ´ –  
1
Set the number of frames.  
Turn the front e-dial while pressing  
the ] button. Select OFF (no  
frames), 3 or 5.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
130  
2
Set the step interval.  
Turn the rear e-dial while pressing  
the ] button. The available  
bracketing amounts in [2. EV Steps]  
in the [A Custom Setting] menu  
(p.73) are as follows.  
1/2 EV  
1/3 EV  
±0.5, ±1.0, ±1.5, ±2.0  
Bracketing amount  
(Step interval)  
±0.3, ±0.7, ±1.0, ±1.3, ±1.7, ±2.0  
3
4
Press the shutter release button halfway.  
The focus indicator ] appears in the viewfinder when focused.  
4
Press the shutter release button fully.  
Three continuous pictures will be taken, the first with no compensation,  
the second with negative compensation, and the third with positive  
compensation (when the number of frames is set to [3]).  
• When the focus mode is set to l(Single mode), the focus is locked in the  
first frame position and used for subsequent continuous frames.  
• When you release your finger from the shutter release button during Auto  
Bracket, the Auto Bracket exposure setting will remain effective for twice as  
much time as the exposure metering timer (default setting is 20 seconds)  
(p.99) and you can take a picture at the next compensation value. In this  
case, auto focusing works for each frame. After about twice as much time as  
the exposure metering timer (default setting is 20 seconds), the camera  
returns to settings for taking the first picture.  
• You can combine Auto Bracket with the built-in flash or external flash (P-TTL  
auto only) to change only the flash output continuously. However, when using  
an external flash, holding the shutter release button down to take three  
continuous frames may cause the second and third frame to be taken before  
the flash is fully recharged. Always take one frame at a time after confirming  
that charging is complete.  
• Exposure Bracket is not available when the exposure mode is set to p(Bulb)  
mode.  
• Exposure Bracket and Multi-exposure cannot be used together. The mode  
set last is used.  
• When [8. One-Push Bracketing] in the [A Custom Setting] menu is set to  
[On], even if the shutter release button is not continuously pressed fully, all  
frames are automatically shot with one press of the shutter release button.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
131  
Taking Only Overexposed or Underexposed Pictures  
You can use Auto Bracket mode for only underexposure or  
overexposure shots by combining the operation with EV  
compensation (p.100). Auto Bracket is performed in both cases on  
the basis of the specified EV compensation value.  
Shooting in Extended Bracket Mode  
You can save pictures with three different white balance, saturation, hue,  
sharpness and contrast levels.  
Unlike exposure bracketing, three pictures are saved with each shot.  
You can set the saving order with [9. Auto Bracketing order] in the [A  
Custom Setting] menu.  
4
Auto Bracketing order  
0 ´ ´ +, – ´ 0 ´ +, + ´ 0 ´ –, 0 ´ + ´ –  
1
Select [Extended Bracket] in the  
[A Rec. Mode] menu and press  
the four-way controller (5).  
Extended Bracket  
Off  
Bracketing amount  
The Extended Bracket screen appears.  
MENU  
2
Press the four-way controller  
(5).  
Extended Bracket  
Off  
White Balance  
Saturation  
Hue  
Contrast  
Sharpness  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
3
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to choose an item.  
Press the 4 button.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
132  
5
Press the four-way controller (3) to select [Bracketing  
amount] and press the four-way controller (5).  
Use the four-way controller (23) to select the bracketing amount.  
For [White Balance], select from BA±1, BA±2, BA±3, GM±1, GM±2 and  
GM±3. The default setting is BA±1.  
For [Saturation], [Hue], [Contrast] and [Sharpness], select from ±1, ±2,  
±3 and ±4. The default setting is ±1.  
6
7
Press the 4 button twice.  
Press the 3 button.  
4
The camera returns to the Capture mode.  
8
Take the picture.  
Three frames are saved.  
• You can use Extended Bracket in combination with Exposure Bracket  
(p.129).  
• Extended Bracket and Multi-exposure cannot be used together. The mode  
set last is used.  
• Extended Bracket is disabled when File Format is set to RAW or RAW+.  
• If Extended Bracket is set when File Format is set to RAW or RAW+, the file  
format changes to JPEG.  
• When Image Tone for Custom Image is set to [Monochrome], bracket  
shooting with [Saturation] and [Hue] is not available.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
133  
Storing User Settings  
You can store the current camera settings and easily retrieve them simply  
by setting the mode dial to A.  
The following settings can be stored.  
Exposure Mode  
Auto Sensitivity Adjustment Range  
White Balance  
Flash Mode  
EV Compensation  
Color Space  
Exposure Bracketing Steps & No. of Frames  
Drive Mode  
File Format  
JPEG Recorded Pixels  
JPEG Quality  
Flash Exposure Compensation  
Extended Bracketing Steps & Type  
Sensitivity  
Expand Dynamic Range  
RAW file format  
4
Store the settings in [USER] in the [R Set-up] menu.  
Saves current shooting  
settings in USER mode  
+1.3  
1.0  
200-1600  
10000K G2 A1  
1.0x5  
BA 3  
-
D-Range  
200%  
RAW+  
AdobeRGB  
14.6  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
Changing the Settings in A Mode  
You can also perform settings when the mode dial is set to  
A.  
To change the Exposure Mode, press the 3 button in Capture mode  
and perform settings in [Exposure Mode] in the [A USER] menu.  
USER  
Exposure Mode  
JPEG Rec. Pixels  
JPEG Quality  
File Format  
RAW file format  
Extended Bracket  
Multi-exposure  
P
Sv  
Tv  
Av  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Changed settings are not saved unless they are registered in [USER] in the [R  
Set-up] menu. When the camera is turned off, the saved settings are applied.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
134  
Memo  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 Using the Flash  
This chapter provides details on the built-in flash of u  
and describes how to take pictures with the external flash.  
Compensating Flash Output .............................136  
Allowing Shooting while Charging Flash .........137  
Flash Characteristics in Each Exposure Mode  
..............................................................................138  
Distance and Aperture when Using the Built-in  
Flash ....................................................................141  
DA, D FA, FA J, FA and F Lens Compatibility with  
the Built-in Flash ................................................142  
Using an External Flash (Optional) ...................143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
136  
Compensating Flash Output  
You can change the flash output in a range of –2.0 to +1.0. The flash  
compensation values are as follows for 1/2 EV and 1/3 EV.  
Step interval  
1/2 EV  
Flash compensation  
–2.0, –1.5, –1.0, –0.5, 0.0, +0.5, +1.0  
–2.0, –1.7, –1.3, –1.0, –0.7, –0.3, 0.0, +0.3, +0.7, +1.0  
1/3 EV  
* Set interval of steps in [2. EV Steps] in the [A Custom Setting] menu. (p.101)  
Turn the rear e-dial to set [Flash Mode] in the Fn menu (p.75).  
Flashh Mode  
Flash On  
5
OK  
OK  
-
0.7  
• The flash output cannot be compensated in Green mode.  
N appears in the LCD panel and the viewfinder during flash exposure  
compensation. (p.27)  
• If the maximum flash output is exceeded when corrected to the plus (+) side,  
no compensation will be effective.  
• Compensating to the minus (–) side may not effect the image if the subject is  
too close, aperture is low or sensitivity is high.  
• This flash compensation is also effective for external flash units which  
support P-TTL auto flash mode.  
• Pressing the Green button on the [Flash Mode] menu returns the flash  
exposure compensation to the default setting (0.0).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
137  
Allowing Shooting while Charging  
Flash  
You can set to enable shooting while flash is being charged.  
Set [On] for [28. Release when Charging] in the [A Custom Setting] menu  
(p.74). Pictures cannot be taken while the flash is charging by default.  
28. Release when Charging  
Off  
On  
Enables shutter release  
while the built-in  
flash is charging  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
138  
Flash Characteristics in Each  
Exposure Mode  
Using the Flash in b(Shutter Priority) Mode  
• When taking a moving subject, you can use the flash to change the blur  
effect.  
• Any desired shutter speed 1/180 sec. or slower can be set for taking a  
flash photograph.  
• The aperture value automatically changes according to the ambient  
brightness.  
• The shutter speed is locked at 1/180 sec. when lens other than DA, D  
FA, FA J, FA, F or A is used.  
Using the Flash in c (Aperture Priority) Mode  
5
• You can set the desired aperture to take a flash photograph when you  
want to change the depth of field or shoot a subject farther away.  
• The shutter speed automatically changes with the ambient brightness.  
• The shutter speed shifts automatically anywhere from 1/180 sec. to a  
slow shutter speed (p.54) that reduces camera shake. The slowest  
shutter speed depends on the focal length of the lens in use.  
• The shutter speed is locked at 1/180 sec. when lens other than DA, D  
FA, FA J, FA or F is used.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
139  
Using the Slow-Speed Sync  
You can use slow-speed sync when shooting portraits with the sunset in  
the background. Both the portrait and the background are captured  
beautifully.  
• Slow-speed sync slows the shutter speed. Use the Shake Reduction function  
or turn off the Shake Reduction function and use a tripod to avoid camera  
shake. The picture will also blur if the subject moves.  
• Slow-speed sync shooting can also be performed with an external flash.  
 Using e/K/c mode  
1 Set the mode dial to e, K or c.  
2 Press the K button.  
3 Press the { button and press the four-way controller (3).  
4 Select G or H and press the 4 button.  
The shutter speed is set slower to give the appropriate exposure for the  
background.  
5
5 Take the picture.  
 Using b/L/amode  
1 Set the mode dial to b, L or a.  
2 Press the { button and press the four-way controller (3).  
3 Select E or F and press the 4 button.  
4 Set the shutter speed (b) or shutter speed and aperture (L/a).  
Set so that proper exposure is obtained in 1/180 sec. or slower.  
5 Press the K button.  
6 Take the picture.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
140  
Using Trailing Curtain Sync  
Trailing curtain sync discharges the flash immediately before the shutter  
curtain closes. When shooting moving objects with a slow shutter speed,  
Trailing curtain sync and Slow-speed sync produce different effects  
depending on when the flash is discharged.  
For example, when shooting a moving car with Trailing curtain sync,  
trailing light is captured while the shutter is open and the flash captures the  
car immediately before the shutter is closed. Therefore, the picture will  
include a sharp, well-lit car with trailing lights behind it.  
5
Slow-speed sync  
Trailing curtain sync  
1 Set the mode dial to any mode other than B or M.  
2 Press the { button and press the four-way controller (3).  
3 Select I or k and press the 4 button.  
4 Press the K button.  
5 Take the picture.  
Trailing curtain sync slows the shutter speed. Turn off the Shake Reduction  
function and use a tripod to avoid camera shake.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
141  
Distance and Aperture when Using  
the Built-in Flash  
A set criteria is necessary between the guide number, aperture and  
distance when shooting with the flash to obtain the correct exposure.  
Calculate and adjust the shooting conditions if flash output is not sufficient.  
Built-in flash guide number  
ISO Sensitivity  
ISO 100  
Built-in flash guide number  
13  
18.4  
26  
ISO 200  
ISO 400  
ISO 800  
ISO 1600  
ISO 3200  
36.8  
52  
73.5  
Calculating Shooting Distance from Aperture Value  
5
The following equation calculates the distance of the flash for aperture values.  
Maximum flash distance L1 = Guide number ÷ Selected aperture  
Minimum flash distance L2 = Maximum flash distance ÷ 5*  
* The value 5 used in the formula above is a fixed value  
which applies only when using the built-in flash alone.  
Example  
When sensitivity is [ISO 100] and aperture value is F2.8  
L1 = 13 ÷ 2.8 = approx. 4.6 (m)  
L2 = 4.6 ÷ 5 = approx. 0.9 (m)  
Therefore, the flash can be used in a range of about 0.9 m to 4.6 m.  
The flash cannot be used when the distance is 0.7 m or less. When the  
flash is used at closer than 0.7 m, it causes vignetting in the picture  
corners, light is distributed unevenly and the picture may be over-exposed.  
Calculating Aperture Value from Shooting Distance  
The following equation calculates the aperture value for shooting distances.  
Aperture value used F = Guide number ÷ Shooting distance  
Example  
When sensitivity is [ISO 100] and shooting distance is 3 m, aperture value is:  
F = 13 ÷ 3 = 4.3  
If the resulting number (4.3, in the above example) is not available as  
a lens aperture, the smaller number that is closest (4.0, in the above  
example) is generally used.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
142  
DA, D FA, FA J, FA and F Lens  
Compatibility with the Built-in Flash  
Depending on the lens used with the u, even if a lens without a  
hood is attached, the use of the built-in flash may not be possible or may  
be limited due to vignetting.  
DA, D FA, FA J, and FA lenses not listed below can be used without  
problems.  
* Following are evaluated without a hood.  
Unavailable due to vignetting  
Lens Name  
DA Fish-eye 10-17mm F3.5-4.5ED (IF)  
DA12-24mm F4ED AL  
DA14mm F2.8ED (IF)  

FA 300mm F2.8ED (IF)  
5

FA 600mm F4ED (IF)  

FA 250-600mm F5.6ED (IF)  
Available depending on other factors  
Lens Name  
Compatibility  
Vignetting may occur if focal length is less than  
20 mm.  
F Fish-eye 17-28mm F3.5-4.5  
When the focal length is less than 28 mm or  
when the focal length is 28 mm and the  
shooting distance is 1 m or less, vignetting  
may occur.  
DA16-45mm F4ED AL  
When the focal length is 20 mm or less or  
when the focal length is 35 mm and the  
shooting distance is less than 1.5 m, vignetting  
may occur.  

DA 16-50mm F2.8ED AL (IF) SDM  
Vignetting may occur if the focal length is less  
than 35 mm.  
DA18-250mm F3.5-6.3ED AL (IF)  
Vignetting may occur if focal length is 28 mm  
and the shooting distance is less than 1 m.  

FA 28-70mm F2.8AL  
FA Soft 28mm F2.8  
FA Soft 85mm F2.8  
Built-in flash always discharges fully.  
Built-in flash always discharges fully.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
143  
Using an External Flash (Optional)  
Using the optional external flash AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ or AF200FG  
enables a variety of flash modes, such as P-TTL auto flash mode,  
depending on the external flash being used. See the chart below for  
details.  
(Yes: Available #: Restricted No: Not available)  
Flash  
Built-in  
Flash  
AF540FGZ  
AF360FGZ  
AF200FG  
Camera Function  
Red-eye reduction flash  
Automatic flash discharge  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
After the flash is charged, the camera  
automatically switches to the flash sync  
speed.  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Aperture is automatically set in  
e
(Hyper-  
5
program) mode and  
mode.  
b
(Shutter Priority)  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
No  
Auto check in the viewfinder  
P-TTL auto flash (appropriate sensitivity:  
100 to 1600)  
*1  
*1  
*1  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Slow-speed sync  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Flash exposure compensation  
AF illuminator  
*2  
Trailing curtain sync  
No  
*3  
*5  
Contrast-control-sync flash mode  
Slave flash  
#
#
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Multiple flash  
High-speed flash sync  
Wireless flash  
Yes  
*5  
*4  
#
Yes  
*1 When using DA, D FA, FA J, FA, F or A lens.  
*2 Shutter speed of 1/90 sec. or slower.  
*3 When combined with the AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ, 1/3 of the flash discharge can be  
output by the built-in flash and 2/3 can be output by the external flash.  
*4 Multiple AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ units or a combination of an AF540FGZ/AF360FGZ  
unit and the built-in flash is required.  
*5 Only available when combined with the AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
144  
About the LCD Panel Display for AF360FGZ  
The AF360FGZ does not have the function to set the FORMAT size to  
[DIGITAL], but the difference in angle of view between standard 35 mm  
format and the u is automatically calculated based on the focal  
length of the lens used (when using DA, D FA, FA J, FA or F lenses).  
The conversion indicator appears and the format size indicator disappears  
when the exposure metering timer of the u is on (it returns to 35 mm  
format display when the exposure metering timer is turned off).  
Lens focal length  
Exposure  
85mm 77mm 50mm 35mm 28mm 24mm 20mm 18mm  
24mm*  
16mm*  
meteringtimer  
Off  
85mm  
58mm  
70mm 50mm  
48mm 34mm  
35mm  
24mm  
28mm  
19mm  
AF360FGZ  
LCD panel  
Exposure  
meteringtimer  
On  
5
* Using wide-angle panel  
Using P-TTL Auto Mode  
Use this flash mode with the AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ or AF200FG flash  
unit. When flash mode is set to [P-TTL auto], the flash pre-flashes before  
the actual flash and confirms the subject (the distance, brightness,  
contrast, whether it is backlit, etc.) using the camera's 16-segment  
metering sensor. The flash output for the actual flash is adjusted based on  
the information obtained from the pre-flash, enabling flash photography  
with more appropriate exposure for the subject than with normal TTL auto.  
P-TTL auto is available in wireless flash mode when two or more  
AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ units are used.  
1 Remove the cover of the hot shoe and attach the external flash  
(AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ).  
2 Turn on the camera and the external flash.  
3 Set the external flash mode to [P-TTL auto].  
4 Confirm that the external flash is fully charged and then take the picture.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
145  
• P-TTL auto is only available with the AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ or AF200FG  
flash unit.  
• The b will light in the viewfinder when the flash is ready (fully charged).  
• For details such as operation method and effective distance, please read the  
external flash manual.  
The flash does not discharge when the subject is bright enough when Flash  
Mode is or . Therefore, it may not be suitable for daylight-sync shooting.  
C
i
• Never press the K button when any external flash unit is attached to the  
camera. The built-in flash will hit the external flash. If you want to use both at  
once, see p.149 for the connection method.  
Using High-Speed Flash Sync Mode  
With the AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ, you can discharge the flash to take a  
picture at a shutter speed faster than 1/180 second. High-speed flash sync  
can be used with the flash attached to the camera, or wireless.  
5
Attaching and Using the AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ on the Camera  
1 Remove the cover of the hot shoe and attach the external flash  
(AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ).  
2 Turn the mode dial and set the exposure mode to b or a.  
3 Turn on the camera and the external flash.  
4 Set the external flash sync mode to HSb (high-speed flash sync).  
5 Confirm that the external flash is fully charged and then take the picture.  
• The b will light in the viewfinder when the flash is ready (fully charged).  
• High-speed flash sync is only available when the shutter speed is faster than  
1/180 sec.  
High-speed flash sync is not available when the exposure mode is set to  
p
(Bulb).  
Using in Wireless Mode  
By using two external flashes (AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ) or using the  
built-in flash with an external flash, you can shoot in P-TTL flash mode  
without connecting the flash units with a cord. High-speed sync mode is  
also available for wireless shooting.  
• Set the power switch of the external flash to [WIRELESS].  
• Set the wireless mode of the external flash not directly connected to the  
camera to [SLAVE].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
146  
Setting the Channel for the External Flash on the Camera  
First set the channel for the external flash unit on the camera.  
1 Set the channel for the external flash unit.  
2 Attach the external flash to the camera hot shoe.  
3 Turn on the camera and the external flash, and press the shutter  
release button halfway.  
The built-in flash is set to the same channel as the external flash unit.  
• When set to r mode, the channel currently set for the built-in flash is  
displayed on the LCD panel for 10 seconds.  
• Be sure to set all the flashes to the same channel. Refer to the AF540FGZ or  
AF360FGZ operating manual for details on how to set the channel on the  
external flash.  
Using the Built-in Flash Wirelessly  
5
Set the camera to wireless flash mode when using an external flash in  
combination with the built-in flash.  
1 Press the { button and press the four-way controller (3).  
The Flash options screen appears.  
2 Use the four-way controller (45) to  
select r mode.  
Flashh Mode  
Press the 4 button to return to Capture  
mode.  
Wirelesss Mode  
OK  
OK  
0.0  
r cannot be set in B mode.  
• When Drive Mode is set to i or the lens aperture is not set to s, r appears  
gray and cannot be selected.  
 Changing the Built-in Flash Discharge Method  
You can change the built-in flash discharge method in wireless mode.  
1
2
On  
Off  
Discharges the built-in flash.  
Discharges the built-in flash as a test flash.  
Set in [29. Flash in Wireless Mode] in the [A Custom Setting] menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
147  
HSb (High-speed sync) is not available when the camera is set to discharge  
the built-in flash.  
Wireless Shooting  
 Using a Combination of the Built-in Flash and an External Flash  
Unit  
1 Remove the external flash unit for which the channel was set on the  
camera, and place at the desired location.  
2 Set the flash mode of the camera to r , and pop up the built-in flash.  
3 Confirm that both flashes are fully charged and then take the picture.  
 Using a Combination of External Flash Units  
1 Set the wireless mode of the external flash directly connected to the  
camera to [MASTER] or [CONTROL].  
Discharges both the flash directly connected to the camera and  
MASTER  
5
the flash connected to another flash unit.  
The flash directly connected to the camera is discharged as a  
test flash only and does not discharge as main flash.  
CONTROL  
2 On the flash connected to another flash unit, set the wireless flash mode  
to [SLAVE] and set the channel to the same channel as the camera.  
Then, place at the desired location.  
3 Confirm that both flashes are fully charged and then take the picture.  
Shake Reduction is not available in Wireless mode.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
148  
Wireless Flash Control (P-TTL Flash Mode)  
When using external flash units (AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ) for  
wireless shooting, the following information is exchanged between  
the flash units before the flash is discharged.  
Press the shutter release button fully.  
1 The flash unit directly connected to the camera emits a test  
flash (relays the flash mode of the camera).  
2 The wireless flash unit connected to another flash unit emits a  
test flash (relays confirmation of subject).  
3 The flash unit directly connected to the camera emits a test  
flash (relays flash output to the wireless flash unit not directly  
connected to the camera).  
* The flash unit directly connected to the camera will emit a test flash  
one more time after this to relay the flash duration time when HS b  
(Highspeed sync) is set.  
5
4 The wireless flash unit connected to another flash unit  
discharges as main flash.  
When the wireless mode of the external flash on the camera is set to  
[MASTER] or [29. Flash in Wireless Mode] (p.146) is set to [On] for the  
built-in flash, all the flash units will discharge simultaneously.  
Red-Eye Reduction  
As with the built-in flash, red-eye reduction is available with an external  
flash.This may not be available on some flashes or may have restrictions  
for usage conditions. See the chart on p.143.  
• The red-eye reduction feature works even when only an external flash is  
used. (p.64)  
If red-eye reduction of the built-in flash is used when the external flash is set as  
the slave unit or with the wireless function, the preflash for red-eye reduction will  
trigger the external flash. Do not use red-eye reduction when using a slave unit.  
Trailing Curtain Sync  
When using the built-in flash with an external flash (AF540FGZ or  
AF360FGZ) that is set to the Trailing curtain sync function, the built-in flash  
will also use this mode. Confirm that both flash units are fully charged before  
shooting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
149  
Using the Built-in Flash with the External Flash  
As shown in the illustration below, attach the Hot Shoe Adapter FG  
(optional) to the camera hot shoe and an Off-Camera Shoe Adapter F  
(optional) to the bottom of the external flash, and connect these with the  
Extension Cord F5P (optional). The Off-Camera Shoe Adapter F can be  
mounted using the tripod screw to your tripod.  
Only the P-TTL auto flash can be used in combination with the built-in flash.  
When combining with the built-in flash  
5
Discharging Multiple Flashes  
You can combine two or more external flashes (AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ or  
AF200FG) or you can use two or more external flashes in combination with  
the built-in flash. You can use the extension cord connection terminal on  
the flash to connect the AF540FGZ. You can connect AF360FGZ or  
AF200FG units as shown in the illustration below. Connect an external  
flash and the Hot Shoe Adapter F (optional) to the Off-Camera Shoe  
Adapter F (optional) and then connect another Off-Camera Shoe Adapter  
F with external flash using the Extension Cord F5P (optional).  
Refer to the flash manual for details.  
• Do not combine with accessories that have a different number of contacts  
such as a Hot Shoe Grip as a malfunction may occur.  
• Combining with flashes from other manufacturers may cause equipment  
breakdown. We recommend using the AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ or AF200FG.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
150  
When combining two or more external flashes  
When using multiple external flashes or an external flash with the built-in flash,  
P-TTL is used for flash control.  
Contrast-Control-Sync Flash  
5
Combining two or more external flashes (AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ or  
AF200FG) or using an external flash in combination with the built-in flash  
allows multiple flash photography (contrast-control-sync flash  
photography). This is based on the difference between the amounts of  
light discharged from multiple units.  
• The AF200FG must be combined with the AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ.  
• Do not combine with accessories that have a different number of contacts  
such as a Hot Shoe Grip as a malfunction may occur.  
• Combining with flashes from other manufacturers may cause equipment  
breakdown. We recommend using PENTAX automatic flashes.  
1 Connect the external flash to the camera indirectly. (p.149)  
2 Set the sync mode for the external flash to the Contrast-Control-Sync  
mode.  
3 Turn the mode dial and set the exposure mode to e, b, cor a.  
4 Confirm that both the external flash and built-in flash are fully charged  
and then take the picture.  
• When using two or more external flashes and the Contrast-Control-Sync  
mode is set on the external master flash unit, the flash output ratio is 2  
(master unit) : 1 (slave units). When external flash is used in combination with  
the built-in flash, the flash output ratio is 2 (external flash) : 1 (built-in flash).  
• When using multiple external flashes or an external flash with the built-in  
flash, P-TTL is used for flash control.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
151  
X-sync Socket  
You can connect an external flash to the  
camera with a sync cord by using the X-sync  
socket.  
• The use of high-voltage or high-current external flashes may cause a camera  
breakdown.  
• When a cord is connected to the X-sync socket, linked functions will not work.  
• To prevent vignetting caused from Trailing curtain sync, it is recommended  
to take a test shot using a shutter speed one level slower than the flash sync  
speed.  
• The contact of the X-sync socket is not splash and dust resistant. Attach the  
provided Sync socket 2P cap when not in use.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
152  
Memo  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 Shooting Settings  
This chapter describes how to set the save format for  
pictures taken and other settings.  
Setting the Image Processing Method in Capture  
Mode (Custom Image) ........................................154  
Setting the File Format ......................................156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
154  
Setting the Image Processing Method  
in Capture Mode (Custom Image)  
By using Custom Image to change the [Image Tone], you can adjust  
settings such as the color and contrast before shooting an image.  
Select from the following six modes for Image Tone: Bright, Natural,  
Portrait, Landscape, Vibrant and Monochrome.  
The default setting varies depending on the [Language/  
(p.224), and it may be set to [Natural].  
] setting  
You can adjust the following items for Image Tone.  
*1  
Saturation  
Sets the color saturation. (Available settings: –4 to +4)  
Sets the color. (Available settings: –4 to +4)  
*1  
Hue  
Changes the contrast to appear as if a B&W color filter  
was used. Sets the filter color. (Available settings: [None],  
[Green], [Yellow], [Orange], [Red], [Magenta], [Blue],  
[Cyan], [Infrared Color])  
*2  
Filter Effect  
Sets the level for cold tone adjustment (- direction) and  
warm tone adjustment (+ direction). (Available settings:  
–4 to +4)  
*2  
Toning  
6
Contrast  
Sets the image contrast. (Available settings: –4 to +4)  
Set the sharpness of the image outlines. (Available  
settings: –4 to +4)  
Sharpness  
*1 This can be set when any mode other than [Monochrome] is selected.  
*2 This can be set when [Monochrome] is selected.  
1
Press the { button in Capture  
mode.  
CUSTOM IMAGE  
Fn  
The shooting Fn menu appears.  
OK  
AUTO  
Fn  
Exit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
155  
2
3
Press the 4 button.  
R
C
The Custom Image screen appears.  
Natural  
M
B
Y
After the power is turned on, the last  
image taken is displayed in the  
background. Set the main switch to  
change the background image to the  
Digital Preview image.  
G
|
to  
Check  
OK  
OK  
Use the four-way controller  
(45) to choose the Image Tone.  
BW  
R
Portrait  
M
B
Y
G
C
Check  
OK  
OK  
4
5
Use the four-way controller (23) to choose the item you  
want to change ([Saturation], [Hue], [Contrast],  
[Sharpness]).  
6
When Image Tone is set to [Monochrome], you can change the settings  
for [Filter Effect], [Toning], [Contrast], and [Sharpness].  
Use the four-way controller (45) to change the setting.  
The background image changes according to the setting.  
You can visually check the saturation and hue with the radar chart.  
For [Sharpness], turn the rear e-dial toward y to change the setting to  
[Fine Sharpness]. The image outlines are even thinner and sharper with  
[Fine Sharpness], making it suited for capturing fine subjects such as  
hair.  
6
Press the 4 button.  
The camera returns to the Capture mode.  
You can save the background image with the current settings as a JPEG  
image. Press the { button to display the image save confirmation screen, and  
then select [Save as] and press the 4 button.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
156  
Setting the File Format  
Setting the JPEG Recorded Pixels  
You can select the number of recorded pixels from X, J, P and i.  
The more pixels there are, the larger the picture and the bigger the file  
size. The file size will also differ according to the [JPEG Quality] setting.  
The default setting is X 4672×3104.  
4672×3104  
3872×2592  
3008×2000  
1824×1216  
14"  
×17" / A2 paper  
X
J
P
i
10"×12" / A3 paper  
8
"×10" / A4 paper  
"×7" / A5 paper  
5
The paper sizes above are references for optimal printing by recorded  
pixels. The quality of the captured photo or printed picture depends on the  
quality level, exposure control, resolution of the printer and a variety of  
other factors.  
6
You can set the JPEG recorded pixels in [JPEG Recorded Pixels] in the  
[A Rec. Mode] menu. (p.72)  
When the number of recorded pixels is changed, the number of recordable  
images appears at the top right of the screen.  
Recordable image no.  
128  
14.6  
M
JPEG Recorded Pix  
JPEG Quality  
10  
File Format  
2
RAW file format  
Extended Bracket  
Multi-exposure  
Off  
Off  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
157  
Setting the JPEG Quality Level  
You can set the image quality level. The file size will also differ according  
to the [JPEG Rec. Pixels] setting. The default setting is C(Best).  
Z
C
D
Premium  
Best  
Images will be clearer but file size will be larger.  
Images will be grainier but file size will be smaller.  
Better  
Good  
E
You can set the JPEG quality level in [JPEG Quality] in the [A Rec. Mode]  
menu. (p.72)  
When the quality level is changed, the number of recordable images at  
that quality level appears at the top right of the screen.  
Recordable image no.  
128  
14.6M  
JPEG Rec. Pixels  
JPEG Quality  
6
File Format  
RAW file format  
Extended Bracket  
Multi-exposure  
Off  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
158  
Setting the File Format  
You can set the format of image files. The default setting is JPEG.  
Captures images in JPEG format. You can change the number of  
recorded pixels from [JPEG Rec. Pixels] in the [  
and the image quality level from [JPEG Quality] in the [  
menu. The file size varies according to the settings.  
A
Rec. Mode] menu,  
Rec. Mode]  
JPEG  
A
RAW data is CMOS sensor output data saved without processing.  
Effects such as White Balance, Custom Image and Color Space are  
RAW not applied to the image but such information is saved. Use Raw  
Display (p.197) or transfer to a PC, apply effects with the enclosed  
PENTAX PHOTO Laboratory 3 and create JPEG or TIFF images.  
Image is saved in both RAW and JPEG formats. When the | button  
RAW+  
is pressed, images are temporarily captured in both formats. (p.19)  
Set [File Format] in the [A Rec. Mode] menu. (p.72)  
When the file format is changed, the number of recordable images  
appears at the top right of the screen.  
You can select PEF or DNG format in [RAW file format] in the [ARec.  
Mode] menu when images are captured in RAW format. The default  
setting is PEF format.  
6
PEF: PENTAX original RAW file format  
DNG:General-purpose, publicly available RAW file format designed by  
Adobe Systems  
128  
Rec. Mode  
14.6M  
14.6M  
JPEG Rec. Pixels  
JPEG Quality  
JPEG Rec. Pixels  
JPEG Quality  
JPEG  
RAW  
RAW+  
Off  
File Format  
File Format  
JPEG  
PEF  
DNG  
Off  
RAW file format  
Extended Bracket  
Multi-exposure  
RAW file format  
Extended Bracket  
Multi-exposure  
OK  
OK  
OK  
MENU  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Cancel  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
159  
Setting the RAW Button Function  
You can set the function when the | button (p.19) is pressed.  
The following settings are available.  
Cancel each time  
File Format  
O(On)/P(Off)  
File format selected when the | button is pressed.  
1
Select [| Button] in the [A Rec. Mode] menu.  
2
Press the four-way controller  
(5).  
RAW button  
Cancel each time  
JPEG  
RAW  
RAW+  
RAW+  
RAW+  
RAW+  
MENU  
6
3
Use the four-way controller (45) to select O (On) or P  
(Off) for [Cancel each time].  
When set to O(On), the recording format each time a picture is taken  
returns to the [File Format] setting in the [A Rec. Mode] menu. The  
default setting is O(On).  
4
5
Use the four-way controller (23) to choose a file format.  
The left side is the [File Format] setting in the [ARec. Mode] menu and  
the right side is the file format when the | button is pressed.  
Press the four-way controller (5), and use the four-way  
controller (23) to select the file format when the |  
button is pressed.  
6
7
Press the 4 button.  
Press the 3 button twice.  
The camera returns to the Capture or Playback mode.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
160  
Setting the White Balance  
White balance is a function for adjusting the color of an image so that white  
objects appear white. Set the white balance if you are not satisfied with the  
color balance of pictures taken with white balance set to F (Auto), or  
to intentionally apply a creative effect to your images. The default setting  
is F (Auto).  
Automatically adjusts the white balance. (About 4000 to  
8000K)  
Auto  
F
G
Daylight  
Shade  
For use when taking pictures in sunlight. (About 5200K)  
For use when taking pictures in the shade. It reduces the  
bluish color tones in a picture. (About 8000K)  
H
For use when taking pictures on cloudy days. (About  
6000K)  
Cloudy  
^
For use when taking pictures under fluorescent lighting.  
Fluorescent Select the type of fluorescent light, from W (white) (about  
J
Light  
4200K), N (neutral white) (about 5000K), and D (daylight)  
(about 6500K).  
6
For use when taking pictures under light bulb or other  
tungsten light. It reduces the reddish color tones in a  
picture. (About 2850K)  
Tungsten  
Light  
I
b
K
K
For use when taking pictures using the built-in flash.  
(About 5400K)  
Flash  
Use this to manually adjust the white balance according to  
the lighting so that white objects appear as a natural  
white.  
Manual  
Color  
Use figures to set the color temperature. You can save  
Temperature three settings.  
* The color temperature (K) is an estimate. This does not indicate precise colors.  
1
Press the { button.  
CUSTOM IMAGE  
Fn  
The Fn menu appears.  
OK  
AUTO  
Fn  
Exit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
161  
2
Press the four-way controller  
(4).  
White Baalance  
Auto  
The White Balance screen appears.  
Check  
OK  
OK  
5000K  
3
4
Press the four-way controller (23) and set.  
Set the main switch to | to display Digital Preview with the set White  
Balance.  
Fine-tuning White Balance is easier with Digital Preview.  
Press the { button to save the background Digital Preview image.  
Press the 4 button.  
The camera is ready to take a picture with the set White Balance.  
6
• Refer to p.163 for manual adjustment method.  
• Preview is Digital Preview, regardless of the [30. Preview Method] setting in  
the [A Custom Setting] menu.  
• The camera automatically performs fine-tuning even when the light source is  
specified. The color temperature of the light source is fixed when [12. WB  
Adjustable Range] in the [A Custom Setting] menu is set to [Fixed].  
• Because the light source changes when the flash discharges, you can set the  
white balance for when the built-in flash discharges. Select [AWB],  
[Unchanged] or [Flash] in [11. WB when using flash] in the [A Custom  
Setting] menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
162  
Fine-Tuning the White Balance  
The u allows you to fine tune the White Balance setting.  
1
Perform desired settings in Steps 1 to 3 of “Setting the  
White Balance”.  
2
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The White Balance fine tune screen appears.  
3
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to fine tune White  
Shade  
Balance.  
G
Seven levels and 225 patterns are  
available on the G-M and B-A axes.  
B
A
G1  
0
M
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
0
6
Adjusts the tone of the colors between green  
and magenta.  
GM compensation  
BA compensation  
23  
45  
Adjusts the tone of the colors between blue  
and amber.  
Press the Green button to reset the GM compensation and BA  
compensation.  
4
5
Press the 4 button.  
The camera returns to the White Balance screen.  
Press the 4 button.  
The camera is ready to take a picture with the set White Balance.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
163  
Adjusting the White Balance Manually  
You can adjust the white balance depending on the light source when  
taking pictures. With Manual White Balance, the camera can store delicate  
shades that cannot be precisely adjusted with the white balance preset  
values provided in the camera (p.160). This provides the optimum white  
balance for your surroundings.  
1
Press the { button.  
The Fn menu appears.  
2
3
Press the four-way controller (4).  
The White Balance screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller (3)  
to select K (Manual).  
White Baalance  
Manual  
6
Check  
OK  
OK  
5000K  
4
5
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The White Balance fine tune screen appears.  
Under the light to adjust the white balance, fully display a  
white sheet of paper in the viewfinder or select a white  
area as the subject.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
164  
6
Press the shutter release button  
fully.  
Slide the focus mode lever to \ when  
the shutter cannot be released.  
The screen to select the measuring range  
is displayed.  
OK  
OK  
7
Use the rear e-dial to select the entire screen or spot area  
for the measuring range.  
8
When a spot area is selected, use the four-way controller  
(2345) to move the frame to the area you want to  
measure.  
9
Press the 4 button.  
Manual  
6
White Ballance  
The White Balance fine-tuning screen  
appears when measuring is completed.  
SHUTTER  
G
Tune using steps in “Fine-Tuning the  
White Balance” if fine-tuning is  
necessary. (p.162)  
B
A
0
0
M
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
0
10 Press the 4 button.  
The camera returns to the White Balance screen.  
11 Press the 4 button.  
The camera is ready to take a picture with the set White Balance.  
• No image is recorded when the shutter release button is pressed to adjust  
the white balance. Press the { button to save the background image as a  
JPEG image. The image save confirmation screen appears. Select [Save as]  
and press the 4 button.  
• [NG] appears when measuring is unsuccessful. Press the 4 button while  
displayed to return to the White Balance fine tune screen for remeasuring.  
• If the picture is extremely overexposed or underexposed, white balance may  
not be adjusted. In this case, adjust appropriate exposure and adjust the  
white balance.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
165  
Adjusting the White Balance with Color Temperature  
Use figures to set the color temperature.  
1
Press the { button.  
The Fn menu appears.  
2
3
Press the four-way controller (4).  
The White Balance screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller (3)  
to select Color Temperature (the  
default setting is 5000K).  
White Balance  
Color Temperature  
5000K  
Check  
OK  
5000K  
5000K 5000K  
OK  
6
4
5
Press the four-way controller (5).  
Use the four-way controller (23) to select the Color  
Temperature to change.  
You can save three settings. Settings are saved to the location selected  
here. Additionally, perform the same operations to change Color  
Temperature that has already been set.  
6
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The screen to enter the color temperature appears.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
166  
7
Adjust the Color Temperature with the front and rear e-dial.  
Color Temperature steps differ depending on the e-dial.  
Kelvin  
1 Step (100K)  
Mired*  
1 Step (20M)  
5 Steps (100M)  
Front e-dial  
Rear e-dial  
10 Steps (1000K)  
* The default setting for Color Temperature step units is Kelvin. You can change the  
step units to Mired in [19. Color temp. steps] in the [A Custom Setting] menu.  
However, figures are converted to Kelvin and displayed.  
You can also use the steps for “Fine-Tuning the White Balance” (p.162)  
to fine tune.  
8
9
Press the 4 button.  
The settings are saved and the camera returns to the White Balance screen.  
Set the main switch to | to display Digital Preview with the set Color  
Temperature.  
Press the 4 button.  
The camera is ready to take a picture with the set White Balance.  
6
Color Temperature  
The color of light shifts towards blue as the color temperature rises, and  
towards red as the color temperature falls. Color temperature describes  
this change in light color in terms of absolute temperature (K: Kelvin).  
This camera is capable of setting the white balance to enable taking  
pictures with natural coloring under a variety of lighting conditions.  
Red tint  
Blue tint  
[
]
2000  
3000  
4000 5000 6000  
8000 10000 12000  
K
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
167  
Setting the Color Space  
You can set the color space to use. The default setting is [sRGB].  
Sets to sRGB color space.  
1
2
sRGB  
Sets to AdobeRGB color space.  
AdobeRGB  
Set [Color Space] in the [ARec. Mode] menu. (p.72)  
Rec. Mode  
Interval Shooting  
Color Space  
Off  
sRGB  
AdobeRGB  
RAW button  
Memory  
Input Focal Length  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
6
File names differ depending on the color space setting as shown below.  
For sRGB : IMGPxxxx.JPG  
For AdobeRGB : _IGPxxxx.JPG  
You can change [IMGP] and [IGP] to the desired characters. (p.231)  
[xxxx] indicates the file number. This is displayed as a four-digit sequential  
number. (p.230)  
Color Space  
Color ranges for various input/output devices, such as digital  
cameras, monitors, and printers, differ.  
This color range is called the Color Space.  
To recreate different color spaces in different devices, standard color  
spaces have been proposed. This camera supports sRGB and  
AdobeRGB.  
sRGB is mainly used for devices such as a PC.  
AdobeRGB covers a wider area than sRGB and is used for  
occupational uses such as industrial printing.  
An image created in AdobeRGB may appear lighter than an image  
created in sRGB when output from an sRGB compatible device.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
168  
Memo  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 Playback Functions  
This chapter describes how to use the various playback  
functions in Playback mode.  
How to Operate the Menus During Playback ...170  
Rotating Images .................................................172  
Enlarging Playback Images ...............................173  
Displaying Multiple Images ...............................175  
Displaying a Folder ............................................177  
Comparing Images .............................................178  
Slideshow ............................................................179  
Changing Playback Display Method .................182  
Deleting Multiple Images ...................................185  
Protecting Images from Deletion (Protect) ......189  
Connecting the Camera to AV Equipment .......191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
170  
How to Operate the Menus During  
Playback  
Press the  
appears.  
3
button in Playback mode. The [  
Q
Playback] menu  
[Q Playback] Menu Setting Items  
Perform settings related to playback and editing images in the  
[Q Playback] menu.  
Item  
Function  
Page  
p.184  
Sets whether to display the Bright/Dark area warning  
Playback display in Playback mode and also sets the initial  
magnification when enlarging images.  
Sets how long to display Instant Review and whether  
Instant Review  
p.227  
to display Bright/Dark area warning and histogram.  
Sets whether to display the grid and AF frame during p.114,  
Live View  
Live View.  
p.228  
Sets whether to display Bright/Dark area warning  
and histogram during Digital Preview.  
p.115,  
p.229  
Digital Preview  
Slideshow  
7
Plays back recorded images one after another.  
p.181  
[A Custom Setting] Menu Setting Items  
Set custom functions to fully use the functions of a SLR camera with the Custom  
Function Menu. The default setting does not change Custom Function.  
The [A Custom Setting] menu settings are activated when [Setting], the  
first item, is O(On).  
Item  
Setting  
Function  
Page  
Sets to change Custom Function.  
32. Saving  
rotation info  
Sets whether to save rotation information when  
shooting.  
33. Auto Image  
Rotation  
Sets to automatically rotate images when playing  
back.  
Reset Custom  
Function  
Resets all the settings in the Custom Function menu  
to the defaults.  
p.239  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
171  
Playback Fn Menu Setting Items  
Press the { button during playback. The Fn  
Fn  
menu appears.  
OK  
Fn  
Exit  
Press the four-way controller (2345) or the 4 button to set the  
operation.  
Key or  
Button  
Item  
Function  
Page  
p.204  
DPOF Settings Sets the DPOF settings.  
Changes the color tone of captured  
2
Digital Filter  
images, adds softening and slimming  
effects, or adjusts the brightness.  
p.194  
p.179  
4
Plays back recorded images one after  
another.  
Slideshow  
5
3
7
RAW Display  
Converts RAW images to JPEG format. p.197  
Image  
Comparison  
You can display two images side-by-  
side.  
p.178  
4
• RAW Display (3) cannot be selected when displaying a JPEG image.  
• DPOF Settings (2) and Digital Filter (4) cannot be selected when displaying  
a RAW image.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
172  
Rotating Images  
The u features a function that uses a sensor to rotate and correct  
the direction of the image when an image is captured with the side of the  
shutter release button facing up and the Mode dial facing down. You can  
also rotate the captured image 90° counterclockwise at a time with the  
steps below.  
100-0001  
3
3
1/250  
F2.8  
OK  
OK  
OK  
OK  
1
Press the Q button.  
Use the four-way controller (45) to display the image you want to  
rotate.  
2
3
Press the four-way controller (3).  
The image is rotated 90° counterclockwise each time the button is  
pressed.  
7
Press the 4 button.  
Image rotation information is saved.  
You cannot save image rotation information for a protected image or when [33.  
Auto Image Rotation] in the [A Custom Setting] menu is set to Off.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
173  
Enlarging Playback Images  
Images can be magnified up to 32 times in playback mode.  
1
Press the  
four-way controller (45) to  
Q
button and use the  
100-0046  
select an image.  
7
1/2000  
F5.6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
174  
2
Turn the rear e-dial to the right  
(toward y).  
100-0046  
Image enlarges at each calibration (1.2  
times* to 32 times).  
Fn  
×2  
Operations available during Enlarged view  
Four-way controller  
Moves area to enlarge  
(2345)  
Rear e-dial (toward right)/  
Green button  
Enlarges image (up to 32 times)  
Rear e-dial (toward left)/  
Reduces image (up to 1.2 times*)  
m button  
4 button  
M button  
Front e-dial  
Returns to the original size  
Switches information display On/Off  
Retains magnification and magnification  
area and shows previous/next image  
{ button  
Retains magnification and magnification  
area and shows image comparison  
(p.178)  
7
* The default setting for the first click (minimum magnification) on the rear e-dial  
(toward right) is 1.2 times. You can change this in [Playback display] in  
[Q Playback] menu. (p.184)  
• You can enlarge the image by following the same procedure during Instant  
Review (p.57), Live View (p.114) or Digital Preview (p.115). However, the  
magnifications available for Live View are 4.0 times and 8.0 times.  
• The initial full display of vertical images is displayed with a magnification of  
0.75 times that of horizontal images, therefore, magnification at the first click  
starts at 1.0 times.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
175  
Displaying Multiple Images  
You can display 4, 9 or 16 images on the monitor at the same time.  
The default setting is 9-image display. The number of images can be  
changed but 9-image display is explained here.  
1
Press the Q button.  
100-0046  
7
1/2000  
F5.6  
2
Turn the rear e-dial to the left  
(toward f).  
Frame  
The multi-image display screen appears.  
Up to nine thumbnail images will be  
displayed at once. Use the four-way  
controller (2345) to select an image. A  
scroll bar appears at the right of the screen.  
With an image selected in the bottom row,  
100-0046  
Select&Delete  
pressing the four-way controller (  
displays the next nine images.  
3)  
Scroll bar  
[?] appears for an image that cannot be  
displayed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
176  
3
Turn the rear e-dial to the right  
(towards y) or press the 4  
button.  
100-0046  
A full screen display of the selected  
image appears.  
1/2000  
F5.6  
Selecting the Number of Images to Display  
1
In the multi-image display  
screen, press the { button.  
The multi-image options screen appears.  
OK  
MENU  
7
2
Use the four-way controller (425) to select the number  
of images to display at once.  
4
2
5
4 images  
9 images  
16 images  
The camera returns to the multi-image display screen.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
177  
Displaying a Folder  
You can display the contents of folders in the multi-image display screen.  
1
Turn the rear e-dial to the left in  
the multi-image display screen.  
100  
103  
101  
104  
102  
105  
100PENTX  
Delete  
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select the folder  
you want to display and press the 4 button.  
The images in the folder are displayed according to the number selected  
in the multi-image options screen.  
Press the i button to delete all images in the selected folder. (p.188)  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
178  
Comparing Images  
You can display two images side-by-side.  
1
Press the { button in Playback  
mode, and then press the 4  
button.  
100-0046  
x1.0  
100-0046  
x1.0  
Two images are displayed side-by-side.  
The same image is displayed on the left  
and right. Turn the front e-dial to select the  
images to compare.  
Fn  
OK  
You can also press the { button in  
Enlarged view to display image comparison.  
Operations available during image comparison  
4 button  
The selection frame changes to both images, left  
image, and right image each time the button is  
pressed.  
Four-way controller  
(2345)  
Moves area to enlarge. When the selection frame  
is selecting both images, you can operate both  
images at the same time.  
7
Green button  
Rear e-dial  
Returns the enlarge display position to the center.  
Enlarges or reduces the image. When the  
selection frame is selecting both images, you can  
operate both images at the same time.  
Front e-dial  
When the selection frame is selecting the left or  
right image, the previous/next image is displayed.  
M button  
Switches information display On/Off.  
ibutton  
When the selection frame is selecting the left or  
right image, the selected image is deleted.  
2
Press the { button.  
The camera returns to the normal Playback mode.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
179  
Slideshow  
You can play back all images recorded on your SD Memory Card  
successively. To start continuous playback, use the menu screen  
displayed on the monitor.  
1
Press the  
Q
button and use the four-way controller (45)  
7
to select an image to be displayed first.  
2
Press the { button.  
Fn  
The Fn menu appears.  
OK  
Fn  
Exit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
180  
3
Press the four-way controller  
(5).  
Start  
OK  
Start screen is displayed and slideshow  
begins.  
Operations available during a slideshow  
4 button  
Pause  
Four-way controller (4)  
Four-way controller (5)  
Four-way controller (3)  
Operations available when paused  
Shows previous image  
Shows next image  
Stop  
4 button  
Resumes playback (Restart)  
Shows previous image  
Shows next image  
Stop  
Four-way controller (4)  
Four-way controller (5)  
Four-way controller (3)  
7
4
Stop the slideshow.  
Slideshow ends when one of the following is performed during playback  
or when paused.  
• Four-way controller (3) is pressed *1  
Q button is pressed *1  
3 button is pressed *1  
• Shutter release button is pressed halfway or fully *2  
= button is pressed *2  
• Main switch is turned to the | position *2  
• Mode dial is turned *2  
*1 After slideshow ends, the camera switches to normal Playback mode.  
*2 After slideshow ends, the camera switches to Capture mode.  
Set the display time for slideshow in the [Q Playback] menu. Alternatively,  
start the slideshow from the [Q Playback] menu. (p.181)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
181  
Setting the Slideshow Display Interval  
Set image display interval for slideshow to [3 sec], [5 sec], [10 sec] or [30  
sec]. The default setting is [3 sec].  
Set whether or not to play back repeatedly. The default setting is [Off].  
1
Select [Slideshow] in the  
[Q Playback] menu.  
Playback  
Playback display  
Instant Review  
Live View  
1
3
sec  
Digital Preview  
Slideshow  
sec  
OK  
MENU  
Exit  
Start  
2
3
Press the four-way controller (5).  
Press the four-way controller (5)  
and use the four-way controller  
(23) to select the image display  
interval.  
Slideshow  
Interval  
3
5
sec  
sec  
Repeat Playback  
10sec  
30sec  
7
Press the 4 button.  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
4
5
6
Use the four-way controller (3) to select [Repeat  
Playback].  
Use the four-way controller (45) to select O (On) or P  
(Off).  
Press the 3 button.  
The camera returns to the [Q Playback] menu.  
Press the 4 button to start slideshow.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
182  
Changing Playback Display Method  
The camera switches display information when you press the M  
button in the Playback screen.  
Standard  
Histogram  
Captured image and indicators are displayed.  
Images and histogram (Brightness/RGB) are displayed.  
Shooting information appears with a small image in the  
upper left.  
Detailed Info  
No info. Display  
Only captured images are displayed.  
• Refer to p.25 for various display information details.  
The information that is shown first during Playback is the last screen that was  
displayed in the previous session. The information can also be displayed from  
Standard when setting in [Memory] (p.236) in the [  
A
Rec. Mode] menu.  
Using the Histogram  
A histogram shows the brightness  
distribution of an image. The horizontal  
axis represents brightness (dark at the  
left and bright at the right) and the  
vertical axis represents the number of  
pixels.  
7
The u features two histogram  
displays. The “Brightness histogram”  
shows the distribution of brightness  
and the “RGB histogram” shows the  
distribution of color intensity.  
(Dark) Brightness(Bright)  
Dark portions Bright portions  
1Histogram Display (p.26)  
The shape of the histogram before and after shooting tells you whether the  
brightness and contrast are correct or not, and lets you decide if you need to use  
EV compensation and take the picture again.  
1Adjusting the Exposure (p.100)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
183  
Understanding Brightness  
If the brightness is correct, the graph peaks in the middle. If the image is  
too dark, the peak is on the left side, and if it is too bright, the peak is on  
the right side.  
Dark image  
Correct image  
Bright image  
When the image is too dark, the part to the left is cut off (dark portions with  
no detail) and when the image is too bright, the part to the right is cut off  
(bright portions with no detail).  
Bright portions blink red on the monitor and dark portions blink yellow  
when Bright/Dark area is on.  
1Playing Back Images (p.68)  
1Setting the Display for Instant Review, Live View and Digital Preview (p.227)  
Understanding Contrast  
The graph peaks gradually in the middle for images in which contrast is  
balanced. The graph peaks on both sides but sinks in the middle for images  
with a large difference in contrast and low amounts of mid-level brightness.  
Understanding Color Balance  
7
Distribution of color intensity is displayed for each color in the RGB histogram.  
The right side of the graphs look similar for images that have White Balance  
adjusted well. If only one color is lopsided to the left, that color is too intense.  
1Setting the White Balance (p.160)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
184  
Setting the Playback Display  
You can set whether or not to display the Bright/Dark area warning in  
Playback mode and set the initial magnification when enlarging images.  
1
Select [Playback display] in the [Q Playback] menu.  
2
Press the four-way controller  
(5).  
Playback display  
Bright/Dark area  
Quick Zoom  
Off  
MENU  
3
Use the four-way controller (45) to select O (On) or P  
(Off).  
4
5
Use the four-way controller (3) to select [Quick Zoom].  
7
Press the four-way controller (5) and use the four-way  
controller (23) to select the magnification.  
6
7
Press the 4 button.  
Press the 3 button twice.  
The camera is ready to take or play back images.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
185  
Deleting Multiple Images  
Deleting All Images  
You can delete all saved images at once.  
Deleted images cannot be restored.  
A confirmation screen appears when there are protected images.  
1
Press the Q button.  
2
Press the i button twice.  
The Delete All screen appears.  
7
3
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select [Delete All].  
Delete alll images  
on memoryy card?  
Delete All  
Cancel  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
186  
4
Press the 4 button.  
All images are deleted.  
A confirmation screen appears when  
there are protected images. Press the  
four-way controller (23) to select  
[Delete All] or [Leave All] and press the  
4 button.  
3 imagge(s)  
Proteccted imaages arree found  
Delete All  
Leave All  
OK  
OK  
Deleting Selected Images (from Multi-image  
Display)  
You can delete multiple images from the multi-image display at once.  
• Deleted images cannot be restored.  
• Protected images cannot be deleted.  
• You can select up to 100 images at a time.  
7
1
Press the Q button.  
2
Turn the rear e-dial to the left  
(toward f).  
The multi-image display screen appears.  
100-0046  
Select&Delete  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
187  
3
4
Press the i button.  
9 appears on the images.  
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to move to the images  
to delete and press the 4  
button.  
Image is selected and Oappears.  
Protected images cannot be selected.  
OK  
MENU  
Delete  
5
6
Press the i button.  
The Delete confirmation screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select [Select&Delete].  
7
All selected  
images aree deleted  
Select&Delete  
Cancel  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
7
Press the 4 button.  
The selected images are deleted.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
188  
Deleting a Folder  
You can delete all images in a selected folder.  
1
Turn the rear e-dial to the left  
(toward f) in Playback mode to  
display the folders.  
100  
103  
101  
104  
102  
105  
100PENTX  
Delete  
2
3
Press the four-way controller  
(2345) to select the folder to  
delete and press the ibutton.  
Delettes alll imagees in the  
selecteed folder  
The Delete Folder confirmation screen  
appears.  
Delete  
Cancel  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
7
Use the four-way controller (2) to select [Delete].  
The folder and all images in the folder are deleted.  
A confirmation screen appears when there are protected images. Press  
the four-way controller (23) to select [Delete All] or [Leave All] and  
press the 4 button.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
189  
Protecting Images from Deletion  
(Protect)  
You can protect images from being accidentally deleted.  
Even protected images are deleted if the SD Memory Card is formatted.  
1
Press the  
to select an image.  
Q
button and use the four-way controller (45)  
2
Press the Z button.  
The Protect screen appears.  
3
4
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select [Protect].  
100-0046  
7
Protect  
Unprootect  
OK  
All images  
OK  
Press the 4 button.  
The selected image is protected.  
• Select [Unprotect] in Step 3 to cancel the Protect setting.  
• The Y icon is displayed when playing back protected images. (p.25, p.26)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
190  
Protecting All Images  
1
Press the Q button.  
2
Press the Z button twice.  
The Protect all images screen appears.  
3
Press the four-way controller  
(23) to select [Protect] and  
press the 4 button.  
Protect alll images  
All images saved in the SD Memory Card  
are protected.  
Protect  
Unprootect  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
7
Select [Unprotect] in Step 3 to cancel the Protect setting on all of the images.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
191  
Connecting the Camera to AV  
Equipment  
By using the provided video cable (I-VC28), you can play back images  
using a TV or other device with a video IN jack as your monitor. Make sure  
that both the TV and the camera are turned off before connecting the  
cable.  
1Selecting the Video Output Format (p.233)  
1
Open the terminal cover, face the arrow on the provided  
video cable toward the S mark on the camera, and  
connect the video cable to the USB/Video terminal.  
7
2
3
Connect the other end of the video cable to the video IN  
jack on the AV device.  
Turn the AV device and camera on.  
• If you intend to use the camera continuously for a long period, use of the AC  
adapter D-AC50 (optional) is recommended. (p.39)  
• For AV equipment with multiple video IN jacks (such as TVs), check the  
operating manual of the AV device, and select the video IN jack to which the  
camera is connected.  
• Depending on the country or region, images may fail to be played back if the  
video output format is set different from the one in use there. If this happens,  
change the video output format setting. (p.233)  
• The camera monitor turns off while the camera is connected to the AV  
device.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
192  
Memo  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8 Processing Images  
This chapter describes how to process pictures taken and  
edit RAW images.  
Processing Images with Digital Filters .............194  
Editing RAW Images ..........................................197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
194  
Processing Images with Digital  
Filters  
You can edit shot images using digital filters. Processed images are saved  
under a different name.  
TIFF and RAW images cannot be processed using the digital filter.  
8
1
Press the { button in Playback  
mode.  
Fn  
The Fn menu appears.  
OK  
Fn  
Exit  
2
Press the four-way controller  
(4).  
B&W  
The screen for selecting the filter  
appears.  
HDR  
MENU  
OK  
OK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
195  
3
4
Use the four-way controller (45) to select an image.  
Use the four-way controller (23) to select a filter.  
Select a filter and preview the effects on the image.  
5
Adjust with the front e-dial and rear e-dial.  
Color  
Slim  
HDR  
HDR  
MENU  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
OK  
OK  
Color Filter  
Slim Filter  
Filter name  
B&W  
Function  
Front e-dial Rear e-dial  
Converts to a black and white  
image. Changes the contrast to  
appear as if a B&W color filter  
was used.  
BW/R/G/B  
Adds a vintage touch to photos by  
converting them to sepia color.  
Select from three levels of  
density.  
8
Density  
(3 levels)  
Sepia  
Color  
Red/Green/  
Blue/Yellow/  
Magenta/  
Cyan  
Adds a color filter to the image.  
Select from 18 filters (6 colors × 3  
tones).  
Density of  
each color  
(3 levels)  
Leaves the selected color in the  
image and converts the rest of the  
image to the same color. Select  
from six extracted colors.  
Extract  
Color  
R/G/B/  
Y/M/C  
Creates a soft image by lightly  
fading the entire image. Select  
from three levels.  
Soft level  
(3 levels)  
Soft  
Creates an image that looks as  
Illustration though it was drawn with a pencil.  
The setting cannot be adjusted.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
196  
Filter name  
HDR  
Function  
Front e-dial Rear e-dial  
Creates an image that looks as  
though it is a high dynamic range  
image. Select from three levels.  
HDR level  
(3 levels)  
Changes the horizontal and  
vertical ratio of images. Adjust  
height or width up to two times the  
original size.  
Left: Wide  
Slim  
Right: Slim  
Changes the brightness of  
Brightness images. Adjust in a range of ±8  
levels.  
Left: Dark  
Right: Light  
When another image is selected with the four-way controller (45), the  
image appears in the set filter.  
6
7
Press the 4 button.  
The save confirmation screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select [Save as].  
Press the 3 button to return to the  
Save iimage aas a neeww file  
previous screen. Select [Cancel] and  
press the 4 button to return to single-  
image playback mode.  
Save as  
Cancel  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
8
8
Press the 4 button.  
The filtered image is saved under a different name.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
197  
Editing RAW Images  
You can convert captured RAW files into JPEG or TIFF files.  
Editing One RAW Image  
1
Press the { button in Playback  
mode.  
Fn  
The Fn menu appears.  
OK  
Fn  
Exit  
2
3
Press the four-way controller  
(3).  
Develop thhis image  
Fn  
OK  
OK  
MENU  
8
Press the 4 button.  
14.6  
M
The parameters recorded in the image  
file appear.  
Recordedd Pixels  
To specify the parameters, see  
“Specifying the Parameters” (p.200).  
AdobeRGB  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
198  
4
Press the 4 button.  
The save confirmation screen appears.  
Save iimage aas a neeww file  
Save as  
Cancel  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
5
6
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Save as].  
Press the 3 button to return to the previous screen. Select [Cancel]  
and press the 4 button to return to single-image playback mode.  
Press the 4 button.  
The edited image is saved under a different name.  
Editing All RAW Images  
Selects and edits multiple RAW images.  
1
Press the { button in Playback mode.  
8
The Fn menu appears.  
2
3
Press the four-way controller (3).  
Press the { button.  
The multi-image display screen appears.  
Fn  
OK  
MENU  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
199  
4
5
Press the four-way controller (2345) to select the RAW  
image to edit and press the 4 button to select the check  
box (O).  
Press the 4 button again to clear the check box (P).  
Turn the rear e-dial toward fto select single-image display and view the  
image.  
You can select up to 100 images at a time.  
Press the { button and use the four-way controller (23)  
to select [Open].  
To specify the parameters, select [Change Setting]. See “Specifying the  
Parameters” (p.200).  
6
7
Press the 4 button.  
The save confirmation screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Save as JPEG]  
or [Save as TIFF].  
Press the 3 button to return to the previous screen. Select [Cancel]  
and press the 4 button to return to single-image playback mode.  
8
8
Press the 4 button.  
All selected RAW images are edited and saved in a new folder.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
200  
Specifying the Parameters  
Specifies the parameters for editing RAW images. When multiple images  
are selected, all images are edited with the same parameters.  
If Quality Level is not set to [TIFF], images are saved as JPEG images.  
1
Select [Change Setting] in Step 3  
of p.197 or Step 5 of p.199 and  
press the 4 button.  
14.6  
M
Recordedd Pixels  
The parameter setting screen appears.  
AdobeRGB  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to choose the parameter  
you want to change.  
The following parameters can be changed.  
JPEG Recorded  
Pixels  
X(4672×3104)/J(3872×2592)/  
P(3008×2000)/i(1824×1216)  
*1  
Z (Premium)/C (Best)/  
D (Better)/E (Good)/TIFF  
Quality Level  
F (Auto), G (Daylight), H (Shade), ^  
(Cloudy), JN (Daylight white fluorescent lights),  
JW (White light fluorescent lights), JD (Daylight  
colors fluorescent lights), I(Tungsten Light), E  
(Flash), K(Manual), Color Temperature (three  
types)  
8
*2  
White Balance  
Sensitivity  
–2.0~+2.0  
Image Tone/Saturation (Filter Effect)/Hue (Toning)/  
Contrast/Sharpness  
Custom Image  
Color Space  
sRGB/AdobeRGB  
High-ISO Noise  
Reduction  
Noise reduction level (4 levels)  
*1 If Quality Level is set to [TIFF], this is fixed at X.  
*2 White Balance cannot be set for RAW files taken in Multi-exposure mode.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
201  
3
Use the four-way controller (45) to change the  
parameter.  
Use the four-way controller (5) to display the setting screen for White  
Balance/Custom Image. To make these settings, see “Adjusting the  
White Balance” (p.160) and “Setting the Image Processing Method in  
Capture Mode (Custom Image)” (p.154).  
• You cannot save the background image or use Digital Preview with White  
Balance/Custom Image.  
• Manual white balance measures an arbitrary position on the image using only  
spot metering. Pressing the shutter release button fully cancels RAW image  
editing and changes to Capture mode.  
4
5
Press the 4 button.  
The save confirmation screen appears.  
Select [Save as] and press the 4 button.  
The RAW image is edited and saved as a new image.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
202  
Memo  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9 Printing from the Camera  
This chapter describes how to make the printing settings.  
Setting the Printing Service (DPOF) .................204  
Printing Using PictBridge ..................................207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
204  
Setting the Printing Service (DPOF)  
You can order conventional photograph prints by taking the SD Memory  
Card with recorded images to a store for a printing service.  
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) settings allow you to specify the  
number of copies or to imprint the date.  
• DPOF settings cannot be applied to RAW images.  
• You can make DPOF settings for up to 999 images.  
Printing Single Images  
Set the following items for each image.  
Copies Selects the number of copies. You can print up to 99 copies.  
Date Specifies whether you want the date inserted on the print or not.  
1
Press the Q button and use the four-way controller (45)  
to select an image.  
2
Press the { button.  
Fn  
The Fn menu appears.  
9
OK  
Fn  
Exit  
3
Press the four-way controller  
(2).  
100-0046  
The DPOF screen appears.  
If DPOF settings have already been  
Copies  
Date  
00  
made for an image, the previous number  
of prints and date setting (O (On) or  
P(Off)) will be displayed.  
Fn  
OK  
OK  
All images  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
205  
4
5
Use the four-way controller (45) to choose the number of  
copies and press the four-way controller (3).  
The frame moves to [Date].  
Use the four-way controller  
100-0046  
(45) to choose whether to  
insert the date (O) or not (P).  
O: The date will be printed.  
Copies  
Date  
01  
P : The date will not be printed.  
You can select the next or previous  
image by turning the front e-dial. Repeat  
Steps 4 and 5 to set multiple images (up  
to 999).  
Fn  
OK  
OK  
All images  
6
Press the 4 button.  
The edited DPOF settings for all images are saved and the camera  
returns to single-image playback mode.  
Depending on the printer or printing equipment at the photo processing lab, the  
date may not be imprinted on the pictures even if the DPOF setting was made.  
• To cancel DPOF settings, set the number of copies to [00] in Step 4 and  
press the 4 button.  
• Press the 3 button while setting to cancel editing of all images.  
9
Settings for All Images  
1
Press the { button in Playback  
mode.  
Fn  
The Fn menu appears.  
OK  
Fn  
Exit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
206  
2
3
Press the four-way controller  
(2).  
100-0046  
The DPOF screen appears.  
Copies  
Date  
00  
Fn  
OK  
All images  
OK  
Press the { button.  
The screen for making DPOF settings for  
all images appears.  
DPOF settiing foor all  
images  
Copies  
Date  
00  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
4
5
Use the four-way controller (45) to choose the number of  
copies and whether to insert the date (O) or not (P).  
Refer to Steps 4 and 5 of “Printing Single Images” (p.205) for details of  
how to make the settings.  
Press the 4 button.  
The DPOF settings for all images are saved and the camera returns to  
single-image playback mode.  
9
The number of copies specified in settings for all images applies to all the  
images. Before printing, check that the number is correct.  
Settings for single images are canceled when settings are made for all images.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
207  
Printing Using PictBridge  
This function lets you print images directly from the camera without using  
a PC (direct printing).  
Connect the camera and PictBridge compatible printer with the included  
USB cable (I-USB17) to print directly.  
Select the images you want to print, the number of copies and whether to  
insert the date or not on the camera after connecting to the printer.  
Direct printing is performed in the following steps.  
Set [USB Connection] on camera to [PictBridge] (p.208)  
Connect the camera to the printer (p.209)  
Set the printing options  
Print single images (p.210)  
Print all images (p.212)  
Print with DPOF settings (p.213)  
• Use of the AC adapter D-AC50 (optional) is recommended when connecting  
the camera to a printer. The printer may not work properly or the image data  
may be lost if the battery runs out of power while the camera is connected to  
the printer.  
• Do not disconnect the USB cable during data transfer.  
• Depending on the type of printer, not all the settings made on the camera  
(such as print settings and DPOF settings) may be valid.  
• A printing error may occur if the selected number of copies exceeds 500.  
• Printing an index of images, where multiple images appear on a single sheet,  
may not be possible unless the printer supports index printing. For index  
prints, you may need to use a PC.  
9
• RAW images cannot be printed directly from the camera. Use [RAW display]  
(p.197) to convert to a JPEG image or transfer to a PC and use PENTAX  
PHOTO Browser 3 to print RAW images.  
See the “PENTAX PHOTO Browser 3/PENTAX PHOTO Laboratory 3  
Operating Manual” when connecting to a PC.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
208  
Setting Transfer Mode  
1
Press the 3 button.  
2
Use the four-way controller  
(45) to select the [R Set-up]  
menu.  
Set-up  
USER  
Format  
Beep  
Date Adjust  
World Time  
Language  
English  
1/4  
MENU  
Exit  
3
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [USB  
Connection].  
Press the four-way controller (5).  
A pop-up menu appears.  
5
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select [PictBridge].  
Set-up  
Text Size  
Std.  
3 sec  
0
Guide display  
Brightness Level  
LCD Color Tuning  
Video Out  
PC  
PictBridge  
USB Connection  
9
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
6
7
Press the 4 button.  
The setting is changed.  
Press the 3 button.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
209  
Connecting the Camera to the Printer  
1
Turn off the camera.  
2
Face the arrow on the provided USB cable toward the S  
mark on the camera, and connect the camera and  
PictBridge compatible printer.  
The PictBridge logo is displayed on PictBridge compatible printers.  
3
4
Turn the printer on.  
After printer start-up is complete,  
turn the camera on.  
Selecct priinnting mode  
The PictBridge menu appears.  
9
Single Image  
All Images  
DPOF AUTOPRINT  
OK  
OK  
PictBridge menu is not displayed if [USB Connection] is set to [PC].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
210  
Printing Single Images  
1
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select [Single Image] on  
the PictBridge menu.  
Selecct priinnting mode  
Single Image  
All Images  
DPOF AUTOPRINT  
OK  
OK  
2
3
Press the 4 button.  
The Print single image screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller  
(45) to choose an image to  
print.  
100-0046  
Print thhis image  
Copies  
1
Date  
Fn  
Date  
Print  
OK  
MENU  
4
5
Use the four-way controller (23) to choose the number of copies.  
You can print up to 99 copies.  
9
Use the  
{
button to choose whether to insert the date (O) or not (P).  
O: The date will be printed.  
P : The date will not be printed.  
6
Press the 4 button.  
Print acccording  
to setttings?  
The print settings confirmation screen  
appears.  
Paperr Size  
Paperr Type  
Quality  
_
_
_
_
Setting  
Setting  
Setting  
Setting  
Proceed to Step 12 to print the images  
using the default setting.  
Border SStatus  
Fn  
Change SSetting  
To change the print settings, go to Step 7.  
OK  
MENU  
Print  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
211  
7
Press the { button.  
PictBridge  
The screen for changing print settings  
appears.  
Paper Size  
Paper Type  
Quality  
_
_
_
_
Setting  
Setting  
Setting  
Setting  
Border Status  
MENU  
8
9
Select [Paper Size] and press the four-way controller (5).  
The Paper Size screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller  
Paper Size  
(
2345) to choose the paper size.  
2L  
8×10″  
A4  
Letter  
11×17″  
A3  
_
Setting  
Card  
You can only choose a size that is  
supported by your printer.  
L
100×150  
Postcard  
4×6″  
When [_ Setting] is selected, images  
are printed according to the printer  
settings.  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
10 Press the 4 button.  
11 Repeat Steps 8 to 10 to set [Paper Type], [Quality] and  
[Border Status].  
The print settings change screen appears after each item has been set.  
9
When [_ Setting] is selected for these print settings, images are printed  
according to the printer settings.  
[Paper Type] with more Es supports higher quality paper.  
[Quality] with more Es indicates higher print quality.  
12 Press the 3 button.  
The camera returns to the print settings confirmation screen in Step 6.  
13 Press the 4 button.  
The image is printed according to the settings.  
Press the 3 button to cancel printing.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
212  
Printing All Images  
1
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select [All Images] on  
the PictBridge menu.  
Selecct priinnting mode  
Single Image  
All Images  
DPOF AUTOPRINT  
OK  
OK  
2
3
Press the 4 button.  
The Print all images screen appears.  
Choose the number of copies  
and whether to imprint the date  
or not.  
100-0046  
Print all images  
The number of copies and the date setting  
that you choose apply to all of the images.  
Copies  
Total  
1
Date  
Fn  
28  
Date  
Refer to Steps 4 and 5 of “Printing Single  
Images” (p.210) for details on how to  
make the settings.  
OK  
MENU  
Print  
4
5
Press the 4 button.  
9
The print settings confirmation screen appears.  
Refer to Steps 7 to 11 of “Printing Single Images” (p.211) for details on  
how to change the settings.  
Press the 4 button on the print settings confirmation  
screen.  
All the images are printed according to the settings.  
Press the 3 button to cancel printing.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
213  
Printing Images Using the DPOF Settings  
1
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [DPOF  
AUTOPRINT] on the PictBridge menu.  
2
Press the 4 button.  
100-0046  
Printt w/DPOOF settttings  
The Print w/DPOF settings screen  
appears.  
Use the four-way controller (45) to  
check the number of copies for each  
image, whether the date is imprinted or  
not, and total number of copies. The  
number of copies and the date setting are  
set with the Print Service. (p.204)  
Copies  
Total  
1
Date  
10  
OK  
MENU  
Print  
3
4
Press the 4 button.  
The print settings confirmation screen appears.  
Refer to Steps 7 to 11 of “Printing Single Images” (p.211) for details on  
how to change the settings.  
Press the 4 button on the print settings confirmation  
screen.  
The images are printed according to the settings.  
9
Press the 3 button to cancel printing.  
Disconnecting the USB Cable  
Disconnect the USB cable from the camera and printer when you have  
finished printing.  
1
Turn off the camera.  
2
Disconnect the USB cable from the camera and printer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
214  
Memo  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10Camera Settings  
This chapter describes how to change the camera settings.  
How to Operate the [R Set-up] Menu ...............216  
Formatting the SD Memory Card ......................218  
Setting the Beep Setting, Date and Time, and  
Display Language ...............................................219  
Adjusting the Monitor and the Menu Display  
..............................................................................225  
Setting the Image File Naming Convention .....230  
Selecting the Video Output Format and Power  
Settings ...............................................................233  
Using Pixel Mapping ..........................................235  
Selecting Capture Mode Settings to Save in the  
Camera ................................................................236  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
216  
How to Operate the [R Set-up] Menu  
Press the 3 button and use the four-way controller (45) to display  
the [R Set-up] menu.  
[R Set-up] Menu Setting Items  
Perform various settings related to the camera in the [R Set-up] menu.  
Item  
Function  
Page  
p.133  
p.218  
p.219  
p.220  
USER  
Format  
Beep  
Registers the current camera settings to USER.  
Formats the SD Memory Card.  
Switches the beep tone on/off.  
Date Adjust  
Sets the date format and time.  
Sets display of local date and time of a specified  
city in addition to the present location on the  
monitor when traveling overseas.  
World Time  
p.221  
Changes the language in which menus and  
messages appear.  
Language/  
p.224  
Text Size  
Sets the size of the text selected in the menus.  
Sets to display indicators in the monitor.  
Changes the brightness of the monitor.  
Adjusts the color of the monitor.  
p.225  
p.225  
p.226  
p.226  
p.233  
p.208  
p.233  
Guide display  
Brightness Level  
LCD Color Tuning  
Video Out  
Sets the output format to the TV monitor.  
Sets the USB cable connection (PC or printer).  
Sets the time to turn off automatically.  
*1  
USB Connection  
Auto Power Off  
Folder Name  
File Name  
10  
Sets the method used to assign folder names for  
storing images.  
p.230  
p.231  
p.234  
Sets the file name of the image to be saved.  
Sets battery priority for when battery grip is  
attached.  
Select battery  
Maps out and corrects for any defective pixels in  
the CMOS sensor.  
Pixel Mapping  
p.235  
Dust Alert  
Detects dust adhering to the CMOS sensor.  
Cleans the CMOS sensor by shaking it.  
p.252  
p.252  
Dust Removal  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
217  
Item  
Function  
Page  
p.254  
p.238  
p.240  
Locks the mirror in the up position for cleaning the  
CMOS sensor.  
Sensor Cleaning  
Reset  
Resets all settings.  
Reset USER  
Resets the saved USER mode settings.  
*2  
setting  
*1 Refer to p.11 of the “PENTAX PHOTO Browser 3/PENTAX PHOTO Laboratory 3  
Operating Manual” for details on connecting the camera to a PC.  
*2 In USER mode, this is displayed instead of Reset.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
218  
Formatting the SD Memory Card  
Use this camera to format (initialize) an SD Memory Card that is unused  
or has been used on other cameras or digital devices.  
Formatting will delete all the data on the SD Memory Card.  
• Do not open the card cover while formatting SD Memory Card. The card may  
be damaged beyond use.  
• Formatting will delete all data, either protected or unprotected. Be aware.  
1
Select [Format] in the [R Set-up] menu.  
2
Use the four-way controller (5) to display the Format  
screen.  
3
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select [Format].  
Format  
All data deleted  
Format  
Cancel  
OK  
OK  
4
Press the 4 button.  
Formatting starts. When formatting is  
completed, the monitor turns off and the  
camera is ready to take pictures.  
Formatting  
10  
MENU  
Cancel  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
219  
Setting the Beep Setting, Date and  
Time, and Display Language  
Turning the Beep On and Off  
You can turn the camera operation beep on or off. The default setting is all  
O(On).  
There are five items that you can set: In-focus, AE Lock, | button, Self-  
timer and Remote Control.  
1
Select [Beep] in the [R Set-up]  
menu.  
Set-up  
USER  
Format  
Beep  
Date Adjust  
World Time  
Language  
English  
1/4  
MENU  
Exit  
2
3
Press the four-way controller  
(5).  
Beep  
Setting  
In-focus  
AE-L  
RAW  
Self-timer  
Remote Control  
MENU  
Select an item and use the four-way controller (45) to  
select On or Off.  
10  
You can turn all the beeps off by selecting [Setting] and pressing the four-  
way controller (45).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
220  
Changing the Date and Time and the Display  
Style  
You can change the initial date and time settings. You can also set the  
display style. Choose [mm/dd/yy], [dd/mm/yy] or [yy/mm/dd]. Choose  
[12h] (12 hour) or [24h] (24 hour) for time display method.  
Set in [Date Adjust] in the [R Set-up] menu. (p.216)  
1Setting the Date and Time (p.48)  
Date Adjust  
Date Style  
Date  
mm/dd/yy 24h  
01 / 01 / 2008  
00 : 00  
Time  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
221  
Setting the World Time  
The date and time selected in “Initial Settings” (p.45) serve as the date and  
time of your present location.  
Setting [World Time] enables you to display the local date and time on the  
monitor when traveling overseas.  
1
Select [World Time] in the [R Set-up] menu.  
2
Press the four-way controller  
(5).  
World Time  
The World Time screen appears.  
New York  
New York  
MENU  
00:25  
3
Use the four-way controller (45) to select X  
(Destination) or W (Hometown).  
This setting changes the date and time on the guide display screen.  
4
5
Press the four-way controller (3).  
The selection frame moves to X (Destination setting).  
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The screen for magnifying the Destination region appears.  
Turn the rear e-dial to change the region to magnify.  
10  
6
Use the four-way controller  
(45) to select the Destination  
Destination  
city.  
The current time, location and time  
difference of the selected city appears.  
London  
DST  
MENU  
+05:00  
05:25  
OK  
Cancel  
OK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
222  
7
Use the four-way controller (3) to select [DST].  
8
Use the four-way controller (45) to select O (On) or P  
(Off).  
Select O(On) if the Destination city uses daylight saving time (DST).  
9
Press the 4 button.  
World Time  
The World Time setting is saved.  
London  
New York  
MENU  
01:25  
10 Press the 3 button twice.  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
• See “List of World Time Cities” (p.223) for cities that can be specified as a  
destination.  
• Select W (Hometown setting) in Step 4 to set the city and DST setting.  
X appears on the guide display screen if World Time is set to X  
(Destination). (p.22)  
• When you change World Time, the Video Out (p.233) setting changes to the  
default setting for that city.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
223  
List of World Time Cities  
Region  
North  
America  
City  
Region  
Africa/  
West Asia  
City  
Honolulu  
Dakar  
Anchorage  
Vancouver  
San Francisco  
Los Angeles  
Calgary  
Algiers  
Johannesburg  
Istanbul  
Cairo  
Jerusalem  
Nairobi  
Denver  
Chicago  
Miami  
Jeddah  
Tehran  
Toronto  
Dubai  
New York  
Halifax  
Karachi  
Kabul  
Mexico City  
Lima  
Male  
Central and  
South  
America  
Delhi  
Santiago  
Caracas  
Buenos Aires  
Sao Paulo  
Rio de Janeiro  
Lisbon  
Colombo  
Kathmandu  
Dacca  
Yangon  
Bangkok  
Kuala Lumpur  
Vientiane  
Singapore  
Phnom Penh  
Ho chi Minh  
Jakarta  
East Asia  
Europe  
Madrid  
London  
Paris  
Amsterdam  
Milan  
Rome  
Hong Kong  
Beijing  
10  
Copenhagen  
Berlin  
Shanghai  
Manila  
Prague  
Stockholm  
Budapest  
Warsaw  
Athens  
Taipei  
Seoul  
Tokyo  
Guam  
Helsinki  
Moscow  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
224  
Region  
Oceania  
City  
Perth  
Adelaide  
Sydney  
Noumea  
Wellington  
Auckland  
Pago Pago  
Setting the Display Language  
You can change the language in which the menus, error messages, etc.  
are displayed.  
Set in [Language/  
] in the [R Set-up] menu. (p.216)  
You can choose from 18 languages: English, French, German, Spanish,  
Portuguese, Italian, Dutch, Danish, Swedish, Finnish, Polish, Czech,  
Hungarian, Turkish, Russian, Korean, Chinese (Traditional/Simplified)  
and Japanese.  
1 Setting the Display Language (p.45)  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
225  
Adjusting the Monitor and the Menu  
Display  
Setting the Text Size  
You can set the size of the text selected in the menus to [Std.] (normal  
display) or [Large] (magnified display).  
Set in [Text Size] in the [R Set-up] menu. (p.216)  
Set-up  
Text Size  
Std.  
Large  
0
Guide display  
Brightness Level  
LCD Color Tuning  
Video Out  
NTSC  
PC  
USB Connection  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Setting the Guide Display Time  
Set the length of time that the guides are displayed on the monitor when  
the camera is turned on or the exposure mode is changed. (p.22)  
Select from [Off], [3 sec], [10 sec] and [30 sec]. The default setting is  
[3 sec].  
Set in [Guide display] in the [R Set-up] menu. (p.216)  
Set-up  
Text Size  
Std.  
Off  
Guide display  
Brightness Level  
LCD Color Tuning  
Video Out  
10  
3
sec  
10sec  
30sec  
PC  
USB Connection  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
226  
Adjusting the Brightness of the Monitor  
You can adjust the brightness of the monitor. Adjust settings when the  
monitor is hard to see.  
Set in [Brightness Level] in the [R Set-up] menu. (p.216)  
Set-up  
Text Size  
Std.  
3sec  
Guide display  
Brightness Level  
0
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Adjusting the Color of the Monitor (LCD Color  
Tuning)  
Adjusts the color of the monitor.  
1
Select [LCD Color Tuning] in the [R Set-up] menu.  
2
Press the four-way controller  
(5).  
LCD Colorr Tuning  
G
M
B
A
G1  
0
10  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
0
3
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to adjust toward G or M  
and use the four-way controller (45) to adjust toward B  
or A.  
You can adjust the setting to one of 15 levels in each direction.  
Press the Green button to reset the adjustment value.  
Press the 4 button.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
227  
5
Press the 3 button.  
The camera returns to the Capture or Playback mode.  
Adjust the value toward G or M to adjust the level of the green or magenta color  
tone. Adjust the value toward B or A to adjust the level of the blue or amber  
color tone.  
Setting the Display for Instant Review, Live  
View and Digital Preview  
You can perform the settings related to Instant Review and Digital Preview.  
Setting the Instant Review  
You can set the Instant Review display time and whether or not to display the  
histogram and Bright/Dark area warning. The default settings are [1 sec] for  
the display time and [Off] for the histogram and Bright/Dark area warning.  
1
Select [Instant Review] in the [Q Playback] menu.  
2
Press the four-way controller  
(5).  
Instant Review  
Display Time  
1sec  
Histogram  
The screen for setting the Instant Review  
Bright/Dark area  
appears.  
10  
MENU  
3
Press the four-way controller (5)  
and use the four-way controller  
(23) to select from [1 sec], [3  
sec], [5 sec] or [Off].  
Instant Review  
Display Time  
1
3
5
sec  
sec  
sec  
Histogram  
Bright/Dark area  
Off  
Press the 4 button.  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
228  
4
5
Use the four-way controller (3) to select [Histogram].  
Use the four-way controller (45) to select O (On) or P  
(Off) for [Histogram].  
6
7
Use the four-way controller (3) to select [Bright/Dark  
area].  
Use the four-way controller (45) to select O (On) or P  
(Off).  
8
Press the 3 button twice.  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
Setting the Live View  
You can set whether or not to display the grid and AF frame during Live  
View. Neither is displayed by default.  
1
Select [Live View] in the [Q Playback] menu.  
2
Press the four-way controller  
(5).  
Live View  
Show Grid  
AF Frame Display  
The screen for setting the Live View  
appears.  
10  
MENU  
3
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select an item and  
use the four-way controller (45) to select O (On) or P  
(Off).  
Press the 3 button twice.  
The camera returns to the Capture or Playback mode.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
229  
Setting the Digital Preview  
You can set whether or not to display the histogram and Bright/Dark area  
warning during Digital Preview. The default setting is [Off] for the  
histogram and Bright/Dark area warning.  
1
Select [Digital Preview] in the [Q Playback] menu.  
2
Press the four-way controller  
(5).  
Digital Preview  
Histogram  
Bright/Dark area  
The screen for setting the Digital Preview  
appears.  
Proceed as from Step 4 in Instant  
Review.  
MENU  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
230  
Setting the Image File Naming  
Convention  
Selecting the Folder Name  
You can select the method for assigning the folder names for storing  
images. The default setting is [Date].  
The two digits of the [month] and [day] on which the picture was taken  
are assigned as the folder name in the form of [xxx_MMDD]. [xxx] is  
a sequential number from 100 to 999.  
Date  
(Example) 101_0125: for folders with pictures taken on January 25th  
The folder name is assigned in the form of [xxxPENTX].  
(Example) 101PENTX  
PENTX  
Set in [Folder Name] in the [R Set-up] menu. (p.216)  
Set-up  
1
min  
Auto Power Off  
Folder Name  
File Name  
Date  
PENTX  
Select battery  
Pixel Mapping  
Dust Alert  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Selecting the File Number Setting  
You can select the method for assigning the file number of an image when  
saved to a new folder. Select O (On) or P(Off) for [File No.] in [Memory]  
in the [ARec. Mode] menu. (p.236)  
10  
The file number of the last image saved to the previous folder is saved  
O (On) and subsequent images are assigned sequential file numbers even if  
a new folder is created.  
The file number of the first image saved to a folder returns to 0001  
P (Off)  
each time a new folder is created for saving images.  
When the number of storable images exceeds 500, captured images are divided into  
folders of 500 images each. However, in Auto Bracket, images will be stored in the same  
folder until shooting is completed, even if the number of images exceeds 500.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
231  
Setting the File Name  
You can change the file names of images.  
The default naming conventions for the color space (p.167) settings are as  
follows.  
[xxxx] indicates the file number. This is displayed as a four-digit sequential  
number. (p.230)  
sRGB  
IMGPxxxx.JPG  
_IGPxxxx.JPG  
AdobeRGB  
For sRGB, you can change [IMGP] (4 characters) to the desired characters.  
For AdobeRGB, of the 4 characters you selected, the first 3 are  
automatically assigned in place of [IGP].  
(Example) When set to [ABCDxxxx.JPG] ´ files are named  
[_ABCxxxx.JPG] for AdobeRGB  
1
Select [File Name] in the [R Set-up] menu.  
2
Press the four-way controller  
(5).  
File Name  
sRGB  
AdobeRGB  
IMGP0123  
_ IGP0123  
Change  
Reset File Name  
MENU  
3
Press the four-way  
controller (23) to  
select [Change] and  
press the four-way  
controller (5).  
File Name  
10  
Text selection  
cursor  
A B C D E F G H  
I
J K L M  
N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z  
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 _  
I
M
G
P
Text change  
cursor  
The text palette screen  
appears.  
MENU  
Fn  
OK  
Cancel  
You can use the rear e-dial to move the text change cursor and use the  
four-way controller (2345) to move the text selection cursor over the  
text palette. Press the 4 button to enter the character selected with the  
text selection cursor to the position of the text change cursor.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
232  
4
5
After entering the desired characters, press the { button.  
The text is changed.  
Press the 3 button twice.  
The camera returns to the Capture or Playback mode.  
You can reset the file name to the default setting by selecting [Reset File  
Name]. (p.241)  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
233  
Selecting the Video Output Format  
and Power Settings  
Selecting the Video Output Format  
When you connect the camera to AV equipment such as a TV, choose the  
appropriate video output format (NTSC or PAL) for playing back images.  
Set in [Video Out] in the [R Set-up] menu. (p.216)  
1 Connecting the Camera to AV Equipment (p.191)  
Set-up  
Text Size  
Std.  
3 sec  
0
Guide display  
Brightness Level  
LCD Color Tuning  
Video Out  
NTSC  
PAL  
USB Connection  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
The default video output format differs depending on the region. When you  
change the region set in World Time, the Video Out setting changes to the  
default setting for that city.  
Setting Auto Power Off  
You can set the camera to turn off automatically if unused after a certain  
length of time. Select from [1 min], [3 min], [5 min], [10 min], [30 min] or  
[Off]. The default setting is [1 min].  
Set in [Auto Power Off] in the [R Set-up] menu. (p.216)  
10  
Set-up  
1
3
5
min  
min  
min  
Auto Power Off  
Folder Name  
File Name  
Select battery  
Pixel Mapping  
Dust Alert  
10min  
30min  
Off  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Auto Power Off will not work during slideshow playback, USB connection, or  
while using the AC adapter.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
234  
Selecting a Battery  
You can set the battery priority to the camera or the battery grip when a  
battery grip (p.256) is attached. The default setting is [Auto Select].  
1
Select [Select battery] in the [R Set-up] menu.  
2
Press the four-way controller  
(5).  
Select battery  
Auto Select  
The screen for selecting the battery  
appears.  
MENU  
3
Press the four-way controller  
(5).  
Select battery  
Auto Select  
Body First  
Use the four-way controller (23) to  
Grip First  
select from [Auto Select], [Body First] and  
[Grip First].  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Auto Select  
Priority is given to the battery with the most remaining power.  
Body First/Grip First Priority is given to the selected battery.  
4
5
Press the 4 button.  
10  
Press the 3 button twice.  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
• If the battery is inserted into both the body and grip, the battery levels of both  
are checked when the power is turned on. Regardless of the [Select Battery]  
setting, both batteries are slightly used.  
• When the currently selected battery runs out as a result of the check, [Battery  
depleted] appears on the monitor. Turn the camera off and on again, and the  
camera will switch to the remaining battery.  
• You can check the battery usage condition on the detailed information  
display in Capture mode. (p.24)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
235  
Using Pixel Mapping  
Pixel mapping is a function for mapping out and correcting for defective  
pixels in the CMOS sensor.  
1
Select [Pixel Mapping] in the [R Set-up] menu.  
2
Press the four-way controller  
(5).  
Pixel Mapping  
For checking the image  
sensor assembly to make  
adjustments  
Pixel Mapping  
Cancel  
OK  
OK  
3
Press the four-way controller (23) to select [Pixel  
Mapping] and press the 4 button.  
Defective pixels are mapped and corrected.  
When the battery level is low, [Not enough battery remaining to activate Pixel  
Mapping] is displayed on the monitor. Use the AC adapter D-AC50 (optional)  
or use a battery with ample capacity remaining.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
236  
Selecting Capture Mode Settings to  
Save in the Camera  
You can select which settings to save when the camera is turned off.  
The following settings can be saved: Flash mode, Drive mode, White  
Balance, Sensitivity, EV Compensation, Flash Exp. Comp., Auto Bracket,  
Playback Display and File No. The default setting is all [On].  
1
Select [Memory] in the [A Rec. Mode] menu.  
2
Press the four-way controller  
(5).  
Memory  
Flash Mode  
Drive Mode  
The memory screen appears.  
White Balance  
Sensitivity  
EV Compensation  
Flash Exp. Comp.  
MENU  
1/2  
3
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to choose an item.  
Use the four-way controller (45) to select O (On) or P  
(Off).  
5
Press the 3 button twice.  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
[File No.] sets whether to save a sequential number for the file name. See  
“Selecting the File Number Setting” (p.230).  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11Resetting to Default  
Settings  
Resets the camera settings.  
Resetting Rec. Mode/Playback/Set-up Menu ...238  
Resetting the Custom Function Menu ..............239  
Resetting Other Settings ...................................240  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
238  
Resetting Rec. Mode/Playback/Set-  
up Menu  
Settings in [A Rec. Mode] menu, [Q Playback] menu and [R Set-up]  
menu can be reset to default settings.  
However, Date Adjust, Language/  
World Time city setting are not reset.  
, Video Out, Text Size and the  
When the exposure mode is set to USER, [Reset USER setting] (p.240) is  
displayed. Set the mode dial to any setting other than A.  
1
Select [Reset] in the [R Set-up] menu.  
2
Use the four-way controller (5) to display the Reset  
screen.  
3
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select [Reset].  
Reset  
Back to initial settings  
Reset  
Cancel  
OK  
OK  
4
Press the 4 button.  
The settings are reset and the camera is ready to take or play back  
images.  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
239  
Resetting the Custom Function Menu  
Reset settings in [A Custom Setting] menu to default settings.  
Settings in [A Rec. Mode] menu, [Q Playback] menu and [R Set-up]  
menu are not reset.  
1
Select [Reset Custom Function] in the [A Custom Setting]  
menu.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (5) to display the Reset  
Custom Function screen.  
Use the four-way controller  
C
Reset Custom Function  
(23) to select [Reset].  
Returns the custom  
function settings  
to initial settings  
Reset  
Cancel  
OK  
OK  
4
Press the 4 button.  
The settings are reset and the camera is ready to take or play back  
images.  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
240  
Resetting Other Settings  
Resetting Saved USER Settings  
You can reset saved USER mode settings to their default settings.  
1
Set the mode dial to A.  
2
3
Select [Reset USER setting] in the [R Set-up] menu.  
Use the four-way controller (5)  
Reset USER setting  
to display the Reset USER  
setting screen.  
Returns USER settings to  
initial settings  
Reset  
Cancel  
OK  
OK  
4
5
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Reset].  
Press the 4 button.  
The saved settings are reset and the camera is ready to take or play back  
images.  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
241  
Resetting the File Name  
If you changed the file name setting (p.231), you can reset this to the  
default setting.  
1
Select [File Name] in the [R Set-up] menu and press the  
four-way controller (5).  
2
3
Press the four-way controller (23) to select [Reset File  
Name] and press the four-way controller (5).  
Press the four-way controller (23) to select [Reset] and  
press the 4 button.  
The file name is reset.  
4
Press the 3 button twice.  
The camera is ready to take or play back images.  
Resetting the Saved AF Adjustment Value  
You can delete the adjustment value saved with AF Adjustment (p.106).  
1
Select [35. AF Adjustment] in the [A Custom Setting]  
menu and press the four-way controller (5).  
2
Press the four-way controller (23) to select [On] and  
press the four-way controller (5).  
The AF Adjustment screen appears.  
11  
3
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Reset] and  
press the four-way controller (5).  
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Reset] and  
press the 4 button.  
The saved adjustment value is deleted and the camera is ready to take  
or play back images.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
242  
Memo  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12Appendix  
Default Settings ..................................................244  
Functions Available with Various Lens  
Combinations .....................................................249  
Notes on [36. Using Aperture Ring] ..................251  
Cleaning the CMOS Sensor ...............................252  
Optional Accessories .........................................256  
Error Messages ..................................................261  
Troubleshooting .................................................264  
Main Specifications ............................................266  
Glossary ..............................................................270  
Index ....................................................................275  
WARRANTY POLICY ..........................................280  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
244  
Default Settings  
The table below lists the factory default settings.  
Table notations are as follows.  
The current setting (last memory) is saved when the camera is turned off.  
Reset Setting  
Yes : The setting returns to the default setting with the reset function  
(p.237).  
No : The setting is saved even after reset.  
[A Rec. Mode] Menu  
Reset  
Setting  
Item  
Default Setting  
Page  
*
Exposure Mode  
e (Hyper-program)  
X (4672×3104)  
C (Best)  
JPEG  
Yes  
p.133  
p.156  
p.157  
p.158  
p.158  
JPEG Recorded Pixels  
JPEG Quality  
File Format  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
RAW file format  
Type  
PEF  
Yes  
Off  
Yes  
Extended  
Bracket  
White Balance  
BA ±1  
Yes  
p.131  
p.103  
Saturation/Hue/  
Contrast/Sharpness  
±1  
Yes  
Number of shots  
Auto EV Adjust  
Interval  
Off  
P(Off)  
1 sec  
1
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Multi-  
exposure  
Number of Shots  
Start Trigger  
Start Time  
Interval  
Shooting  
p.120  
Now  
0:00  
Color Space  
RAW button  
Memory  
p.167  
p.159  
sRGB  
O(On)  
Cancel each time  
JPEG/RAW/RAW+  
File Format  
Yes  
All RAW+  
12  
Yes  
Yes  
p.236  
p.67  
All O(On)  
Input Focal Length  
35 (Focal Length)  
* Appears only when Mode dial is set to A (USER).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
245  
[Q Playback] Menu  
Reset  
Setting  
Item  
Default Setting  
Page  
p.184  
Bright/Dark area  
P(Off)  
P(Off)  
1 sec  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Playback  
display  
Quick Zoom  
Display Time  
Histogram  
Instant  
Review  
P(Off)  
P(Off)  
P(Off)  
P(Off)  
P(Off)  
P(Off)  
3 sec  
p.227  
Bright/Dark area  
Show Grid  
Live View  
p.228  
p.229  
p.181  
AF Frame Display  
Histogram  
Digital  
Preview  
Bright/Dark area  
Interval  
Slideshow  
Repeat Playback  
P(Off)  
[R Set-up] Menu  
Reset  
Setting  
Item  
Default Setting  
Page  
*1  
USER  
Format  
Beep  
Yes  
p.133  
p.218  
p.219  
All O(On)  
Yes  
According to default  
setting  
Date Adjust  
No  
Yes  
No  
p.220  
World Time setting  
W (Hometown)  
According to default  
setting  
Hometown (City)  
Hometown (DST)  
World Time  
Language/  
According to default  
setting  
p.221  
No  
Destination (City)  
Destination (DST)  
Same as Hometown  
Same as Hometown  
No  
No  
According to default  
setting  
No  
No  
p.224  
p.225  
12  
According to default  
setting  
Text Size  
Guide display  
3 sec  
±0  
Yes  
Yes  
p.225  
p.226  
Brightness Level  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
246  
Reset  
Setting  
Item  
LCD Color Tuning  
Default Setting  
±0  
Page  
p.226  
p.233  
Yes  
According to default  
setting  
Video Out  
No  
USB Connection  
Auto Power Off  
Folder Name  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
p.208  
p.233  
p.230  
p.231  
p.234  
p.235  
p.252  
PC  
1 min  
Date  
IMGP  
*2  
Yes  
File Name  
Select battery  
Yes  
Auto Select  
Pixel Mapping  
Dust Alert  
Dust Removal  
Start-up action  
Dust  
Removal  
p.252  
Yes  
P(Off)  
Sensor Cleaning  
Reset  
p.254  
p.238  
p.240  
Reset USER setting  
*1 Reset only for [Reset USER setting] displayed when Mode dial is set to A (USER).  
*2 Reset only for [Reset File Name] in the [File Name] menu.  
[A Custom Setting] Menu  
Reset  
Item  
Default Setting  
Page  
Setting  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Settings  
P(Off)  
Normal  
1/2 EV Steps  
1 EV Steps  
Off  
p.73  
p.82  
p.101  
p.78  
p.78  
p.99  
p.110  
p.99  
p.130  
p.129  
1. Program Line  
2. EV Steps  
3. Sensitivity Steps  
4. Expand sensitivity  
5. Meter Operating Time  
6. AE-L with AF locked  
7. Link AF Point and AE  
8. One-Push Bracketing  
9. Auto Bracketing order  
10. Auto EV Compensation  
11. WB when using flash  
12. WB Adjustable Range  
10 sec  
Off  
Off  
Off  
12  
0 - +  
Off  
Unchanged  
Auto Adjustment  
p.161  
p.161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
247  
Reset  
Setting  
Item  
Default Setting  
Page  
13. AF Button Function  
14. AF by Press Halfway  
15. Superimpose AF Area  
16. AF in remote control  
17. Slow Shutter Speed NR  
18. High-ISO Noise Reduction  
19. Color temp. steps  
20. e-dial in Program  
Enable AF  
On  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
p.112  
On  
p.107  
p.74  
p.80  
p.80  
p.166  
Off  
Auto  
Off  
Kelvin  
Front: b Rear: c  
21. e-dial in K mode  
22. e-dial in b mode  
23. e-dial in cmode  
24. e-dial in L & a  
25. e-dial in p & M  
Front: —  
Front: b Rear: —  
Front: — Rear: c  
Front: b Rear: c  
Front: — Rear: c  
Rear: o  
p.92,  
p.95  
26. Green button inL & a  
Program Line  
Yes  
27. Illuminate LCD panel  
28. Release when Charging  
29. Flash in Wireless Mode  
30. Preview Method  
On  
Off  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
p.29  
p.137  
p.146  
p.113  
On  
Live View  
Off  
31. Display Sensitivity  
32. Saving rotation info  
33. Auto Image Rotation  
34. Catch-in focus  
On  
On  
Off  
p.112  
p.106  
p.251  
p.239  
*1  
35. AF Adjustment  
Off  
Yes  
36. Using aperture ring  
Prohibited  
Yes  
*2  
Reset Custom Function  
*1 The saved adjustment value is reset only for [Reset] in the [35. AF Adjustment] menu.  
*2 The [A Custom Setting] menu settings are reset.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
248  
Fn Menu  
Reset  
Setting  
Item  
Default Setting  
Page  
p.117,  
p.122,  
p.125  
9 (Single frame  
Drive Mode  
Yes  
shooting)  
*1  
Flash Mode  
E (Flash On)  
Yes  
Yes  
p.60  
White Balance  
F(Auto)  
p.160  
AUTO  
(ISO 100 - 400)  
ISO Sensitivity  
Yes  
p.78  
*2  
Custom Image  
DPOF Settings  
Natural  
Yes  
No  
p.154  
p.204  
p.194  
p.179  
*3  
Digital Filter  
B&W  
3 sec  
Yes  
Yes  
Slideshow  
Recorded Pixels: 14.6 M  
Quality Level: C  
Sensitivity: ±0  
RAW Display  
Yes  
p.197  
p.178  
Image Comparison  
*1 Automatically discharged in Green Mode.  
*2 [Bright] when [Language/  
] is set to a language other than Japanese.  
*3 The filter color and frequency settings can be saved or reset.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
249  
Functions Available with Various  
Lens Combinations  
Lenses that can be used with this camera  
Only DA and FA J lenses and D FA/FA/F/A lenses having an s position  
on the aperture ring can be used with this camera. Refer to Notes on [36.  
Using Aperture Ring] (p.251) for other lenses and D FA/FA/F/A lenses with  
aperture ring set to a position other than s.  
Lens [Mount type]  
DA/D FA/  
F lens  
[KAF]*3  
A lens  
[KA]  
FA J/FA lens  
*3  
Function  
[KAF, KAF2]  
Autofocus (Lens only)  
Yes  
Yes  
*1  
*5  
(With AF adapter 1.7×)  
Manual focus  
(With the focus indicator)  
Yes  
*2  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
(With Matte field)  
*5  
Eleven AF points  
No  
*6  
Power zoom  
Yes  
Aperture Priority Automatic Exposure  
Shutter Priority Automatic Exposure  
Manual Exposure  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
*4  
P-TTL Auto Flash  
Multi (16-segment) metering  
Automatic lens focal length acquirement  
when using the Shake Reduction  
function  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes : Functions are available when the aperture ring is set to the  
No : Functions are unavailable.  
s
position.  
*1 Lenses with a maximum aperture of f/2.8 or brighter. Only available at sposition.  
*2 Lenses with a maximum aperture of f/5.6 or brighter.  
*3 To use an F/FA soft 85 mm f/2.8 lens or FA soft 28 mm f/2.8 lens, set [36. Using aperture  
ring] (p.75) to [Permitted] in the [A Custom Setting] menu. Pictures can be taken with the  
aperture you set, but only within manual aperture range.  
12  
*4 When using the built-in flash and AF540FGZ/AF360FGZ/AF200FG.  
*5 The AF point becomes O (Center).  
*6 Only available with KAF2 mount FA lenses.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
250  
Lens names and mount names  
DA lenses with an ultrasonic motor and FA zoom lenses with power zoom  
use the KAF2 mount.  
FA prime lenses (non-zoom lenses), DA lenses without ultrasonic motors  
and D FA, FA J and F lenses use the KAF mount.  
See the lens manual for details.  
Lenses and accessories that cannot be used with this camera  
When aperture ring is set at other than the s (Auto) position or a lens  
without an sposition or accessories such as an auto extension tube or  
auto bellows are used, camera does not operate unless [36. Using  
aperture ring] (p.75) is set to [Permitted] in the [A Custom Setting] menu.  
Refer to Notes on [36. Using Aperture Ring] (p.251) for restriction that  
apply when [36. Using aperture ring] is set to [Permitted] in the [A Custom  
Setting] menu.  
All camera exposure modes are available when using DA/FA J or lenses  
with an Aperture s position set to the sposition.  
Lens and Built-in Flash  
The built-in flash cannot be regulated and fully fires when pre A lenses or  
soft focus lenses are used.  
Note that the built-in flash cannot be used as an Auto Flash.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
251  
Notes on [36. Using Aperture Ring]  
Aperture Ring Use  
When [36. Using aperture ring] is set to [Permitted] in [A Custom Setting]  
menu (p.75), the shutter can be released even if the aperture ring of the  
D FA, FA, F or A lens is not set to the sposition or a lens without a s  
position is attached. However, the features will be restricted as shown in  
the table below.  
The camera operates in c(Aperture Priority) mode even if the mode dial is at  
B, e, K, bor L when the aperture is set to a value other than s.  
Lens Used  
Exposure Mode  
Restriction  
The aperture remains open  
D FA, FA, F, A, M (lens  
only or with auto  
diaphragm accessories  
such as auto extension  
tube K)  
regardless of the aperture ring  
position. The shutter speed  
changes in relation to the open  
aperture but an exposure error may  
occur. In the viewfinder, [F--]  
appears for the aperture indicator.  
c (Aperture  
Priority) mode  
D FA, FA, F, A, M, S (with  
diaphragm accessories  
such as extension tube K)  
c (Aperture  
Priority) mode  
Pictures can be taken with the  
specified aperture value but an  
exposure error may occur. In the  
viewfinder, [F--] appears for the  
aperture indicator.  
Manual diaphragm lens  
such as reflex lens (lens  
only)  
c (Aperture  
Priority) mode  
Pictures can be taken with the  
specified aperture value in the  
manual aperture range. In the  
viewfinder, [F--] appears for the  
aperture indicator. When depth of  
field is checked (Optical Preview),  
AE Metering is switched on.  
Exposure check is possible.  
FA, F soft 85mm FA soft c (Aperture  
28mm (lens only)  
Priority) mode  
Pictures can be taken with the set  
aperture value and shutter speed.  
In the viewfinder, [F--] appears for  
the aperture indicator. When depth  
of field is checked (Optical  
12  
a (Hyper-  
manual) mode  
All lenses  
Preview), AE Metering is switched  
on. Exposure check is possible.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
252  
Cleaning the CMOS Sensor  
Shadows may appear in the image for white backgrounds and other  
shooting conditions if the CMOS sensor becomes dirty or dusty. This  
indicates that the CMOS sensor must be cleaned.  
Removing Dust by Shaking the CMOS Sensor  
The Dust Removal function shakes the CMOS sensor to remove dust that  
has collected.  
1
Select [Dust Removal] in the  
[R Set-up] menu and press the  
four-way controller (5).  
Dust Removal  
Dust Removal  
Start-up action  
OK  
MENU  
Start  
2
Press the 4 button.  
The Dust Removal function is activated by shaking the CMOS sensor.  
Select [Start-up action] and use the four-way controller (45) to select  
O(On) to turn Dust Removal on every time the camera is turned on.  
Detecting Dust on the CMOS Sensor (Dust  
Alert)  
Dust Alert is a function that detects dust adhering to the CMOS sensor and  
visually displays the location of the dust.  
You can save the detected image and display it when performing sensor  
cleaning (p.254).  
Be sure to have a lens attached when using the Dust Alert function.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
253  
1
Select [Dust Alert] in the [R Set-  
up] menu.  
Set-up  
1
min  
Auto Power Off  
Folder Name  
File Name  
Date  
IMGP  
Select battery  
Pixel Mapping  
Dust Alert  
MENU  
Cancel  
3/4  
2
3
Press the four-way controller (5).  
Point the lens at a white wall or  
other uniform surface and press  
the shutter release button fully.  
After image processing is performed, the  
Dust Alert screen appears.  
OK  
x1  
Exit  
4
Press the 4 button.  
The image is saved and Dust Alert is exited.  
• The exposure time may be extremely long when using the Dust Alert  
function. Note that if the direction of the lens is changed before processing is  
complete, dust will not be detected properly.  
• The Dust Alert image can only be displayed during sensor cleaning within 30  
minutes from the time the image is saved. If 30 minutes elapse, save a new  
Dust Alert image and then perform sensor cleaning.  
• The saved Dust Alert image cannot be displayed in Playback mode.  
• Dust Alert image cannot be saved when an SD Memory Card is not inserted.  
• If [NG] is displayed in Step 3 and the camera is unable to detect dust, press  
the 4 button and take another picture.  
• Regardless of the camera settings, a picture will be taken with specific  
shooting conditions in Step 3.  
12  
• When using a lens with an aperture ring, make sure the aperture ring is set  
to the sposition.  
• Press the M button or turn the rear e-dial when displaying the Dust Alert  
image to view it at full screen display.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
254  
Removing Dust with a Blower  
Raise the mirror up and open the shutter to clean with a blower. Please  
contact PENTAX Service Center for professional cleaning because the  
CMOS sensor is a precision part. Cleaning services involve a fee.  
You can use the Imagesensor Cleaning Kit O-ICK1 (optional) when  
cleaning the CMOS.  
• Do not use a spray type blower.  
• Do not clean the sensor when the exposure mode is set to p(Bulb) mode.  
• Always cap the lens mount area to prevent dirt and dust from accumulating  
on the CMOS sensor when no lens is on the camera.  
• When the battery level is low, [Not enough battery remaining to clean sensor]  
is displayed on the monitor.  
• If you are not using the AC adapter D-AC50, please use a battery with ample  
capacity remaining. If the battery capacity becomes low during cleaning, a  
message will be displayed on the monitor and a warning beep will sound.  
Please stop cleaning immediately.  
• Do not put the tip of the blower inside the lens mount area. If the power is  
turned off, this could cause damage to the shutter, CMOS sensor or the  
mirror.  
• It is recommended to use the AC adapter D-AC50 (optional) when cleaning  
the sensor.  
• The self-timer lamp blinks and [Cln] appears on the LCD panel while cleaning  
the sensor.  
• This camera features a CMOS sensor shifting shake reduction system, and  
it may generate a vibration sound while cleaning the CMOS sensor. It is not  
a malfunction.  
1
Turn the camera off and remove the lens.  
Turn the camera on.  
2
3
Select [Sensor Cleaning] in the [R Set-up] menu.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
255  
4
5
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The Sensor Cleaning screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select [Mirror Up].  
Sensor Cleaning  
Starts mirror lockup to clean  
the sensor. Turn the power off  
to finish  
Mirror Up  
Cancel  
OK  
OK  
6
7
Press the 4 button.  
The mirror is locked in the up position.  
If you used Dust Alert to detect dust on the sensor within the last 30  
minutes, the Dust Alert image appears on the monitor. Clean the sensor  
while checking the location of the dust.  
Clean the CMOS sensor.  
Use a brush-less blower to remove dirt  
and dust from the CMOS sensor. Using a  
blower with a brush may scratch the  
CMOS sensor. Do not wipe the CMOS  
sensor with a cloth.  
8
9
Turn off the camera.  
Attach the lens after the mirror returns to its original  
position.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
256  
Optional Accessories  
A number of dedicated accessories are available for this camera. Please  
contact a PENTAX Service Center for details regarding accessories.  
Products marked with an asterisk (*) are the same as those supplied with  
the camera.  
Battery Grip D-BG2  
The Battery Grip has features such as a shutter release button, front e-  
dial, rear e-dial, and L button to accommodate shooting vertically.  
Power Supply Accessories  
AC Adapter D-AC50  
Lets you power your camera with the  
outlet when combined with the AC plug  
cord.  
Battery Charger D-BC50 (*)  
Rechargeable Lithium-ion Battery D-  
LI50 (*)  
AC plug cord (*)  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
257  
Flash Accessories  
Auto Flash AF540FGZ  
Auto Flash AF360FGZ  
The AF540FGZ and AF360FGZ are P-TTL auto flash units with a  
maximum guide number of approximately 54 and approximately 36 (ISO  
100/m), respectively. Their features include slave-sync flash, contrast-  
control-sync flash, auto flash, high-speed sync flash, wireless flash, slow-  
speed sync and trailing curtain sync flash.  
Auto Flash AF200FG  
The AF200FG is a P-TTL auto flash unit with a maximum guide number of  
approximately 20 (ISO 100/m). It features contrast-control-sync flash and  
slow-speed sync flash when combined with the AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ  
unit.  
AF540FGZ  
AF360FGZ  
AF200FG  
Hot Shoe Adapter FG  
Extension Cord F5P  
Off-camera Shoe Adapter F  
Use the adapters and cords to use the external flash away from the camera.  
12  
Hot Shoe Adapter FG  
Off-camera Shoe Adapter F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
258  
Off-camera Shoe Clip CL-10  
When using the AF540FGZ or  
AF360FGZ as a wireless flash, this  
large clip is used for setting the external  
flash on a desk or table.  
For Viewfinder  
Magnifier Eyecup O-ME53  
This viewfinder accessory is for  
magnifying up to 1.18 times.  
When the eyecup is attached to the  
u with a viewfinder magnification  
of 0.95 times, the combined  
magnification becomes 1.12 times,  
making manual focusing much easier.  
Magnifier FB  
This viewfinder accessory is for  
magnifying the central area of the  
viewfinder 2×.  
You can see the entire view by simply  
flipping up the accessory from the eye-  
piece, as it is a hinge-type magnifier.  
Ref-converter A  
This is an accessory that changes the  
viewfinder viewing angle at 90°  
intervals. The viewfinder magnification  
can be switched between 1× and 2×.  
Diopter correction lens adapter M  
This accessory adjusts the diopter.  
Install it on the viewfinder.  
12  
If it is difficult to see the viewfinder image  
clearly, choose one of the eight  
correction lens adapter M of  
-1  
approximately –5 to +3 m (per meter).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
259  
ME Viewfinder Cap (*)  
Eyecup FP (*)  
Interchangeable Focusing Screen  
LF-80: AF Frame Matte (standard)  
LL-80: AF Divided Matte  
LI-80: AF Scale Matte  
Cable Switch CS-205  
Connect to the cable switch terminal  
and operate the camera shutter release  
button. The cord length is 0.5 m.  
Remote Control F  
Lets you shoot pictures from within 5 m  
of the front or back of the camera.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
260  
Camera Case/Strap  
Camera Case O-CC55  
Camera Strap O-ST53 (*)  
Imagesensor Cleaning Kit O-ICK1  
Clean the optical parts such as the  
CMOS sensor and lens of this camera.  
Others  
Body Mount Cap K  
Hot Shoe Cover FK (*)  
USB Cable I-USB17 (*)  
Video Cable I-VC28 (*)  
Sync Socket 2P Cap (*)  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
261  
Error Messages  
Error Message  
Description  
The SD Memory Card is full and no more images  
can be saved. Insert a new SD Memory Card or  
delete unwanted images. (p.40, p.70)  
You may be able to save new images by  
converting to JPEG format or changing the JPEG  
record pixels or JPEG quality setting. (p.156,  
p.157)  
Memory card full  
No image  
There are no images for playback on the SD  
Memory Card.  
You are trying to play back an image in a format  
Camera cannot display this not supported by this camera. You may be able  
image  
to play it back on another brand of camera or  
your computer.  
The SD Memory Card is not inserted in the  
camera. (p.40)  
No card in the camera  
Memory card error  
The SD Memory Card has a problem, and image  
capture and playback are impossible. It may be  
viewable on a PC but not with this camera.  
The SD Memory Card you have inserted is  
unformatted or has been formatted on a  
computer or other device and is not compatible  
with this camera. Use the card after formatting it  
with this camera. (p.218)  
Card not formatted  
Card locked  
A locked SD Memory Card is inserted in the  
camera. Unlock the SD Memory Card. (p.41)  
The card is electronically  
locked  
Data is protected by the SD Memory Card  
security feature.  
You are trying to enlarge an image that cannot be  
enlarged.  
This image cannot be enlarged  
This image is protected  
Battery depleted  
You are trying to delete an image that is  
protected. Remove protection from the image.  
(p.189)  
The battery is exhausted. Install a charged  
battery in the camera. (p.35)  
12  
Appears during sensor cleaning if the battery  
Not enough battery remaining level is insufficient. Replace the battery with a  
to clean sensor  
charged one or use an AC adaptor D-AC50  
(optional). (p.39)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
262  
Error Message  
Description  
Appears during pixel mapping if the battery level  
Not enough battery remaining is insufficient. Replace the battery with a charged  
to activate Pixel Mapping  
one or use an AC adaptor D-AC50 (optional).  
(p.39)  
The maximum folder number (999) and file  
number (9999) are being used, and no more  
images can be saved. Insert a new SD Memory  
Card or format the card. (p.218)  
Image folder cannot be  
created  
The image could not be saved because of an SD  
Memory Card error.  
The image is not stored  
Settings not stored  
The DPOF settings or rotated image could not be  
saved because SD Memory Card is full. Delete  
unwanted images and perform DPOF settings or  
rotation again. (p.70)  
The camera was unable to measure the manual  
white balance or detect dust on the sensor. Try  
the operation again. (p.163, p.252)  
NG  
Rotation information cannot New rotation information cannot be saved to an  
be saved to this image  
image without rotation information.  
No more images can be  
selected  
You cannot select 100 or more images to delete  
or edit at a time. (p.186, p.198)  
This RAW file cannot be  
developed  
RAW files captured with other cameras cannot  
be edited on this camera.  
Appears when digital filter is started from Fn  
menu for images captured with other cameras.  
This image cannot be filtered  
No DPOF files  
No file set with DPOF. Set DPOF and then print.  
(p.204)  
There is an error with the printer and the file  
cannot be printed. Fix all the errors and try  
printing again.  
Printer error  
Printer has run out of paper. Put paper in the  
printer and print.  
No paper in the printer  
The camera received notification that the printer  
Printer settings are changed status has changed. Press the 4 button to  
reconnect to the printer.  
Printer is running out of paper. This appears  
Low paper level in the printer when this signal is received from the printer. After  
two seconds, the printer resumes printing.  
12  
Printer is running out of ink. This appears when  
Low ink level in the printer  
this signal is received from the printer. After two  
seconds, the printer resumes printing.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
263  
Error Message  
Description  
No ink in the printer  
Printer has run out of ink. Replace ink and print.  
Paper is jammed in the printer. Remove paper  
and print.  
Paper stuck in the printer  
Data error  
A data error has occurred during printing.  
This appears when exiting the PictBridge mode.  
Turn the main switch off.  
Turn the power off  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
264  
Troubleshooting  
We recommend checking the following items before contacting a service  
center.  
Problem  
Cause  
The battery is not Check if a battery is installed. If not, install a  
installed charged battery.  
Remedy  
The camera  
does not turn  
on  
The battery power Replace with a charged battery or use the  
is low  
AC adapter D-AC50 (optional). (p.39)  
Set the lens aperture ring to the sposition  
(p.84) or select [Permitted] in [36. Using  
aperture ring] in the [A Custom Setting]  
menu (p.251).  
The lens aperture  
ring setting is other  
than the sposition  
The shutter  
does not  
release  
The flash is  
charging  
Wait until charging is finished.  
There is no available Insert an SD Memory Card with available  
space on the SD  
Memory Card  
space or delete unwanted images. (p.40,  
p.70)  
Recording  
Wait until recording is finished.  
Autofocus cannot focus well on subjects that  
have low contrast (the sky, white walls), dark  
colors, intricate designs, rapidly-moving objects  
or scenery shot through a window or a net-like  
pattern. Lock focus on another object located at  
the same distance as your subject (press the  
shutter release button halfway), then aim at  
target and press the shutter release button fully.  
Alternatively, use manual focus. (p.110)  
The subject is  
difficult to focus on  
Position the subject in the focus frame in the  
middle of the viewfinder. If the subject is  
The subject is not outside the focusing area, aim the camera  
in the focusing  
area  
at the subject and lock the focus (press the  
shutter release button halfway), then  
compose a picture and press the shutter  
release button fully.  
The  
Autofocus  
does not work  
The subject is too Move away from the subject and take a  
close picture.  
The focus mode is Set the focus mode lever to l(Single  
set to \  
mode). (p.104)  
Autofocus is not locked (focus lock) when  
the focus mode is set to k. The camera  
12  
The focus mode is will continue focusing on the subject while  
set to k the shutter release button is pressed  
(Continuous mode) halfway. If there is a subject that you wish to  
focus on, slide the focus mode lever tol  
and use the focus lock.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
265  
Problem  
AE lock  
function does  
not operate  
Cause  
Remedy  
AE lock is not  
available when set  
to B (Green), p  
(Bulb) or M (Flash  
X-sync speed)  
mode  
Use AE lock with any setting other than B  
(Green), p(Bulb) or M (Flash X-sync  
speed) mode.  
Only  
flash+Redeye reduct) are available for the  
Flash Mode when the Capture mode is  
C
(Auto discharge) and  
D
(Auto  
B
.
The flash  
does not  
discharge  
The Capture mode  
is set to B (Green)  
mode  
The flash will not discharge when the subject  
is brightin these modes. Inthe Capture modes  
other than  
B, only the flash mode that  
discharges every time the flash recharges is  
available. Try different Capture modes.  
The USB  
connection with The Transfer Mode  
Set [USB Connection] in the [R Set-up]  
menu to [PC].  
a computer  
is set to  
does not work [PictBridge]  
properly*  
The USB  
connection  
The Transfer Mode Set [USB Connection] in the [R Set-up]  
with a printer  
does not work  
properly  
is set to [PC]  
menu to [PictBridge]. (p.208)  
The Shake  
Reduction function Turn on the Shake Reduction switch.  
is off  
If a lens for which focal length information  
The Shake  
cannot be acquired is used, set the [Focal  
Reduction function  
Length] on the [Input Focal Length] menu.  
is not set properly  
(p.67)  
Shake  
Reduction  
does not work  
Shutter speed is  
too low for the  
Shake Reduction  
function to be  
effective when  
panning or  
Turn off the Shake Reduction function and  
use a tripod.  
shooting night  
scenes, etc.  
The subject is too Move away from the subject, or turn off the  
close Shake Reduction function and use a tripod.  
In rare cases, the camera may not operate correctly due to static electricity. This  
can be remedied by taking the battery out and putting it back in again. When the  
mirror remains in the up position, take the battery out and put it back in again.  
Then, turn the power on. The mirror will retract. After the procedure is done, if the  
camera operates correctly, it does not require any repairs.  
12  
* Refer to p.11 of the “PENTAX PHOTO Browser 3/PENTAX PHOTO Laboratory  
3 Operating Manual” for details on connecting the camera to a PC.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
266  
Main Specifications  
TTL autofocus, auto-exposure SLR digital-still camera with  
built-in retractable P-TTL flash  
Type  
Effective Pixels  
Sensor  
Approx. 14.6 megapixels  
Total pixels approx. 15.07 megapixels, CMOS with a primary  
color filter  
X (RAW: 4672×3104 pixels), X (JPEG: 4672×3104  
pixels), J (3872×2592 pixels), P (3008×2000 pixels),  
i (1824×1216 pixels)  
Recorded Pixels  
Auto, ISO 100 to 3200 (Standard output sensitivity) (EV steps  
can be set to 1 EV, 1/2 EV or 1/3 EV), ISO 6400 is available  
with the custom function setting, up to ISO 1600 is available  
during p  
Sensitivity  
(Standard output  
sensitivity)  
RAW (PEF/DNG), JPEG (Exif 2.21), DCF 2.0 compliant,  
DPOF compatible, Print Image Matching III compatible,  
RAW+JPEG simultaneous capturing compatible  
File Format  
JPEG Quality  
Z (Premium), C(Best), D(Better), and E(Good)  
Storage Medium  
Number of Shots  
SD Memory Card, SDHC Memory Card  
Capacity  
Recorded  
Pixels  
File Format/  
JPEG Quality  
4GB  
2GB  
1GB  
512MB 256MB 128MB  
(PEF) Approx. 162  
(DNG) Approx. 161  
Approx. 82  
Approx. 40  
Approx. 20  
Approx. 20  
Approx. 34  
Approx. 58  
Approx. 10  
Approx. 10  
Approx. 17  
Approx. 29  
Approx. 53  
Approx. 5  
Approx. 5  
|
|
X
4672×3104  
Approx. 82  
Approx. 40  
Approx. 68  
Approx. 272 Approx. 138  
Approx. 8  
Z
Approx. 469 Approx. 239 Approx. 117  
Approx. 15  
Approx. 27  
Approx. 53  
Approx. 13  
Approx. 21  
Approx. 38  
Approx. 79  
Approx. 22  
Approx. 36  
Approx. 63  
X
4672×3104  
C
D
E
Approx. 843 Approx. 429 Approx. 212 Approx. 105  
Approx. 1630 Approx. 830 Approx. 411 Approx. 205 Approx. 103  
Approx. 404 Approx. 206 Approx. 101  
Approx. 674 Approx. 343 Approx. 168  
Approx. 50  
Approx. 84  
Approx. 25  
Approx. 42  
Approx. 74  
Z
C
D
E
J
3872×2592  
Approx. 1183 Approx. 602 Approx. 296 Approx. 148  
Approx. 2463 Approx. 1254 Approx. 616 Approx. 308 Approx. 155  
Approx. 705 Approx. 359 Approx. 176  
Approx. 88  
Approx. 44  
Approx. 71  
Z
C
D
E
Approx. 1138 Approx. 579 Approx. 285 Approx. 142  
P
3008×2000  
Approx. 1946 Approx. 991 Approx. 491 Approx. 245 Approx. 123  
12  
Approx. 3657 Approx. 1862 Approx. 915 Approx. 457 Approx. 230 Approx. 118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
267  
Capacity  
1GB 512MB 256MB 128MB  
Recorded  
Pixels  
File Format/  
JPEG Quality  
4GB  
2GB  
Approx. 1828 Approx. 931 Approx. 461 Approx. 230 Approx. 116  
Approx. 2943 Approx. 1499 Approx. 737 Approx. 368 Approx. 185  
Approx. 59  
Approx. 95  
Z
C
D
i
1824×1216  
Approx. 4827 Approx. 2458 Approx. 1233 Approx. 616 Approx. 310 Approx. 159  
Approx. 8620 Approx. 4390 Approx. 2238 Approx. 1118 Approx. 564 Approx. 289  
E
JPEG Quality (Compression): Z (Premium) = 1/2.8, C(Best) = 1/4.5, D(Better)  
= 1/8, E (Good) = 1/16  
Auto, Daylight, Shade, Cloudy, Fluorescent Light (D: Daylight,  
White Balance  
Monitor  
N: Neutral White, W: White), Tungsten Light, Flash, Manual,  
Color Temperature (3 types), fine tuning available  
2.7 inch wide viewing field TFT color LCD with approx. 230,000  
dots, brightness adjustment function, color adjusting function  
Single frame, 4-image display, 9-image display, 16-image  
display, zoom display (up to 32 times, scrolling possible), image  
comparison, rotating, folder display, slideshow, histogram,  
bright/dark area  
Playback Function  
B&W, Sepia, Color, Extract Color, Soft, Illustration, HDR, Slim,  
Brightness (only for processing after shooting)  
Digital Filter  
A, Green, eHyper-program, K Sensitivity priority,  
bShutter priority, cAperture priority, L Shutter & Aperture  
priority, aHyper-manual, pBulb, M Flash X-sync speed  
Exposure Mode  
Electronically controlled vertical-run focal-plane shutter, Speed  
range (1) Auto 1/4000 to 30 sec. (stepless), (2) Manual 1/4000  
to 30 sec. (1/2 EV step or 1/3 EV step), Bulb, Electromagnetic  
release, Shutter lock by setting Main switch in OFF position.  
Shutter  
PENTAX KAF2 bayonet mount (AF coupler, lens information  
contacts, K-mount with power contacts)  
Lens Mount  
Lens Used  
PENTAX KAF2 mount lenses (power zoom compatible), KAF  
mount lenses, KA mount lenses  
TTL phase-matching autofocus system (SAFOX VIII), AF  
operational brightness range: EV –1 to 18 (at ISO 100 with f/1.4  
lens), Focus lock available, Focus Mode: l(Single)/k  
(Continuous)/\, Adjustable AF point  
Autofocus System  
Viewfinder  
Pentaprism Finder, Interchangeable Natural-Bright-Matte II  
focusing screen, Field of view: approx. 95%, Magnification:  
approx. 0.95× (with 50 mm f/1.4 lens at ), Diopter: approx.  
-1  
-1  
–2.5m to +1.5m (per meter)  
Focus information: ]is lit when in-focus and blinking when  
unable to focus, b is lit = Built-in flash ready, b is blinking =  
Flash should be used or incompatible lens is being used, Shutter  
12  
Viewfinder Indication speed, Confirm Sensitivity, Aperture value, e-dial enabled  
indicator, @ = AE lock, Capacity remaining, m = EV  
compensation, N = Flash compensation, \= Manual focus,  
Shake Reduction display, EV bar, RAW/RAW+  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
268  
b is lit = Built-in flash ready, b is blinking = Flash should be  
used or incompatible lens is being used, 3 = Auto discharge,  
> = Redeye reduction, Q = Slow-speed sync, 9=Single  
frame shooting, j = Continuous shooting, g = Self-timer,  
h= Remote control shooting, ? = Battery exhaustion  
warning, ] = Auto bracket exposure (EV steps can be set to 1/  
2 EV or 1/3 EV), N = Flash exposure compensation, Confirm  
sensitivity, Shutter speed, Aperture value, White Balance,  
Remaining capacity, m = EV compensation, PC (mass storage)/  
Pb (PictBridge) appears when the USB cable is connected, EV  
bar, 1, 1P  
LCD Panel Display  
Live View: TTL method using the image sensor, Zoom Display  
and Show Grid are usable  
Optical Preview:Depth of field confirmation (electronically  
controlled and usable in all exposure modes)  
Digital Preview: Composition, exposure, focus and white  
balance confirmation  
Preview Function  
Up to approx. 3 fps, JPEG: up to 38 frames (Hi) / until SD  
Memory Card is full (Lo), RAW: up to 14 frames (PEF) / up to 16  
frames (DNG)  
Continuous shooting  
(Hi/Lo)  
Burst Shooting  
Approx. 21 fps, JPEG (Y/C): up to approx. 115 frames  
Electronically controlled with delay time of 12 sec./2 sec. (with  
mirror up function). Start by pressing the shutter release button.  
Operation confirmation: Possible to set beep. Can be cancelled  
after operation  
Self-timer  
PENTAX Remote Control F (optional) Release shutter  
immediately or three seconds after pressing the remote control  
shutter button, Remote Continuous Shooting  
Remote Control  
Mirror  
Quick-return mirror, mirror up function (2 sec. self-timer)  
Image Tone (6 types), Saturation/Filter Effect, Hue/Toning,  
Contrast, Sharpness  
Custom Image  
Three or five frames (underexposed, proper exposure and  
overexposed) are shot continuously with exposure bracketing.  
(Selectable between 1/2 EV and 1/3 EV for EV steps)  
Exposure Bracket  
Three frames are saved continuously with white balance,  
saturation, hue, contrast and sharpness bracketing.  
Extended Bracket  
Multi-exposure  
Select the number of shots between 2 and 9 (Auto EV Adjust can  
be set according to the number of shots)  
TTL multi (16-segment metering), Exposure range from EV 0 to  
EV 21 at ISO 100, with 50 mm f/1.4 lens, Center-weighted and  
Spot metering mode can be set  
Exposure Meter/  
Exposure Range  
12  
±3 EV (1/2 EV Steps), ±2 EV (1/3 EV Steps), EV Steps can be  
selected  
EV Compensation  
AE Lock  
Button type (timer type: two times the meter operating time set  
in Custom Setting) Continuous as long as the shutter button is  
halfway pressed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
269  
P-TTL built-in flash with serial control, GN approx. 13 (ISO 100  
• m), Angles of coverage: 18 mm lens angle of view, Flash  
synchronization speed range at 1/180 sec. and slower,  
Daylight-sync flash, Slow-speed-sync flash, ISO range = P-  
TTL: 100 to 6400  
Built-in Flash  
Hot shoe with M-contact, which couples with PENTAX  
dedicated auto flashes, ISO range = P-TTL: 100 to 1600,  
Automatic flash, Red-eye reduction flash function, High-speed-  
sync, wireless-sync with PENTAX dedicated flash.  
External Flash Sync  
Custom Function  
Time Function  
36 functions can be set  
World Time settings for 75 cities (28 time zones)  
SP coating and CMOS sensor operations for dust removal. Can  
be set to operate when the camera is turned on.  
Dust Removal  
Power  
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery D-LI50, AC adapter D-AC50  
(optional)  
Number of recordable images: approx. 740 images (without  
*1  
*2  
flash) / approx. 530 images (50% flash usage) , playback  
*1  
time: approx. 330 minutes  
*1 The number of recordable images (without flash) and playback  
time are based on PENTAX measuring conditions. Some  
deviation from the above figures may occur in actual use  
depending on usage conditions.  
Battery Life (23°C)  
*2 The number of recordable images (50% flash usage) is based on  
measuring conditions in accordance with CIPA standards. Some  
deviation from the above figures may occur in actual use  
depending on usage conditions.  
Battery exhaustion symbol  
indication appears in the viewfinder when  
?
is lit. (The shutter is locked and no  
starts blinking.)  
Battery Exhaustion  
In/Out Port  
?
USB/Video terminal (USB 2.0 (high speed compatible)), DC  
input terminal, Cable switch terminal, X-sync socket  
Video Output Format NTSC/PAL  
Compatible printer PictBridge-compatible printer  
Print mode Single Image, All Images, DPOF AUTOPRINT  
PictBridge  
Approx. 141.5 mm (W) × 101 mm (H) × 70 mm (D) (excluding  
protrusions) 715 g (body only), 800 g (including a battery and an  
SD Memory Card)  
Dimensions and  
Weight  
Hot shoe cover FK, Eyecup FP, ME viewfinder cap, Sync socket  
2P cap, Body mount cover, USB Cable I-USB17, Video cable  
I-VC28, Software (CD-ROM) S-SW74 (PENTAX PHOTO  
Browser 3/PENTAX PHOTO Laboratory 3), S-SW75 (PENTAX  
REMOTE Assistant 3), Strap O-ST53, Rechargeable lithium-ion  
battery D-LI50, Battery charger D-BC50, AC plug cord,  
Operating Manual (this book), Quick Guide, PENTAX PHOTO  
Browser 3/PENTAX PHOTO Laboratory 3 Operating Manual,  
PENTAX REMOTE Assistant 3 Operating Manual  
Accessories  
Languages  
12  
English, French, German, Spanish, Portuguese, Italian, Dutch,  
Danish, Swedish, Finnish, Polish, Czech, Hungarian, Turkish,  
Russian, Korean, Chinese (Traditional/Simplified) and Japanese  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
270  
Glossary  
AdobeRGB  
Color space recommended by Adobe Systems, Inc. for commercial  
printing. Wider range of color reproduction than sRGB. Covers most of the  
color range so colors only available when printed are not lost when editing  
images on a computer. When image is opened by non-compatible  
software, the colors look lighter.  
AE Metering  
Brightness of subject is measured to determine exposure. In this camera,  
select from [Multi-segment Metering], [Center-weighted Metering] and  
[Spot Metering].  
Aperture  
The aperture increases or reduces the light beam (thickness) passing  
through the lens to the image sensor.  
Auto Bracket  
For automatically changing the shooting conditions. An image with no  
compensation, an underexposed image and an over-exposed image are  
captured. Features exposure bracket that captures images in different  
exposures, and extended bracket that captures images with set white  
balance, saturation, hue, contrast and sharpness levels.  
Bright Portion  
Overexposed area in the image loses contrast and appears white.  
Camera Shake (Blur)  
When the camera moves while the shutter is open, the entire image  
appears blurred. This occurs more often when shutter speed is low.  
Prevent camera shake by raising the sensitivity, using the flash, and  
raising the shutter speed. Alternatively, use a tripod to stabilize the  
camera. As camera shake is mostly likely to occur when pressing the  
shutter release button, use the Shake Reduction function, the self-timer,  
the remote control unit, or the cable switch to prevent camera movement.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
271  
CMOS Sensor  
Photography element which converts the light entering through the lens  
into electric signals that create the image.  
Color Space  
A defined range of colors from the spectrum which are used. In digital  
cameras, [sRGB] is defined as the standard by Exif. In this camera,  
[AdobeRGB] is also used because of the richer color expression over  
sRGB.  
Color Temperature  
This numerically expresses the color of the light source illuminating the  
subject. This is indicated in absolute temperature, using Kelvin (K) units.  
The color of light shifts to a bluish color as the color temperature rises, and  
to a reddish color as the color temperature falls.  
Dark Portion  
Underexposed area in the image loses contrast and appears black.  
DCF (Design Rule for Camera File System)  
A digital camera file system standard established by the Japan Electronics  
and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA).  
Depth of field  
Area of focus. This depends on the aperture, lens focal length, and  
distance to the subject. For example, select a smaller aperture (higher  
number) to increase the depth of field or use a larger aperture (smaller  
number) to decrease the depth of field.  
DNG RAW file  
DNG (Digital Negative) is a general-purpose RAW file format designed by  
Adobe Systems. When images captured in proprietary RAW formats are  
converted to DNG format, support and compatibility for the images  
increases significantly.  
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format)  
12  
Rules for writing information onto a card with recorded images regarding  
the specific images and number of copies to be printed. Prints can easily  
be made by taking images to a DPOF photo printing store.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
272  
Dynamic Range (D-Range)  
Indicated with a value expressing the light level reproducible in an image.  
This is the same as the term “latitude” used with silver halide film.  
Generally, when the dynamic range is wide, it is difficult for bright and dark  
areas to occur in the image, and when the dynamic range is narrow, a  
sharp image can be achieved.  
EV (Exposure Value)  
Exposure value is determined by the combination of the aperture value  
and the shutter speed.  
EV Compensation  
Process of adjusting the image brightness by changing the shutter speed  
and/or aperture value.  
Exif (Exchangeable image file format for digital still camera)  
A standard digital camera file format established by the Japan Electronics  
and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA).  
Focus point  
Position in the viewfinder that determines focus. In this camera, select  
from [Auto], [Select] and [Center].  
Histogram  
A graph that shows the darkest and brightest points in an image. The  
horizontal axis represents the brightness and the vertical axis represents  
the number of pixels. This is useful when you wish to refer to the exposure  
status of an image.  
ISO Sensitivity  
The level of sensitivity to light. With a high sensitivity, images can be shot  
with a high shutter speed even in dark places, reducing camera shake.  
However, images with high sensitivity are more susceptible to noise.  
JPEG  
An image compression method. In this camera, select from Z  
(Premium), C(Best), D(Better), or E(Good). Images recorded in  
JPEG format are suited for viewing on your PC or for attaching to e-mail.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
273  
Mired  
Proportional scale of measurement that consistently shows color change  
per unit. Determined by multiplying the inverse of the color temperature by  
1,000,000.  
ND (Neutral Density) Filter  
A filter with many saturation levels that adjusts the brightness without  
affecting the color tone of pictures.  
Noise Reduction  
Process to reduce noise (image roughness or unevenness) caused by  
slow shutter speed or high sensitivity shooting.  
NTSC/PAL  
These are video output formats. NTSC is mainly used in Japan, North  
America, and South Korea. PAL is mainly used in Europe and in China.  
Quality Level  
This refers to the image compression ratio. The lower the compression,  
the more detailed the image. The image becomes rougher as the  
compression rate rises.  
RAW data  
Unedited image data output from the image sensor. RAW data is data  
before being internally processed by the camera. Camera settings at the  
time of capture, such as White Balance, Contrast, Saturation, and  
Sharpness can be set for each frame after shooting. In addition, RAW data  
is 12 bit data that contains 16 times the information of 8 bit JPEG and TIFF  
data. Rich gradations are possible. Transfer RAW data to your computer  
and use the provided software to create image data with different settings,  
such as JPEG or TIFF.  
Recorded Pixels  
Indicates the size of the image by the number of pixels. The more pixels  
that compose a picture, the larger the image size.  
12  
Shutter Speed  
The length of time that the shutter is open and light strikes the image  
sensor. The amount of light that strikes the image sensor can be changed  
by altering the shutter speed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
274  
sRGB (standard RGB)  
International standard of color space established by the IEC (International  
Electrotechnical Commission). This is defined from color space for PC  
monitors and is also used as the standard color space for Exif.  
Vignetting  
The picture edges are blackened when part of the light coming from the  
subject is blocked by the hood or filter ring, or when the flash is partially  
blocked by the lens.  
White Balance  
While shooting, color temperature is adjusted to match the light source so  
that the subject appears to have correct color.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
275  
Index  
Auto Bracket ........................ 129  
Auto Power Off ..................... 233  
Autofocus = ...................... 104  
Automatic Sensitivity  
Correction .............................. 78  
c(Aperture Priority) mode ... 89  
AV Equipment ...................... 191  
Symbols  
[A Custom Setting]  
Menu ......................73, 170, 246  
i(Delete) button .............21, 70  
m (EV Compensation)  
button .............................19, 100  
] (Exposure Bracket)  
button .............................19, 129  
K (Flash pop-up)  
B
p(Bulb) Mode ....................... 96  
B&W (Digital Filter) .............. 195  
Battery .................................... 35  
Beep ..................................... 219  
Bright/Dark area ................... 182  
Brightness (Digital Filter) ...... 196  
Brightness level .................... 226  
Brightness of the Monitor ..... 226  
Built-in Flash .......................... 60  
Bulb Mode p.......................... 96  
Burst Shooting ..................... 119  
button ...............................19, 60  
B (Green mode) ...................83  
Q (Playback)  
button .........................19, 21, 68  
[Q Playback] Menu ....170, 245  
| Preview ............................114  
Z (Protect) button .......21, 189  
[A Rec. Mode] Menu .....72, 244  
[R Set-up] Menu ..........216, 245  
A
AC Adapter .............................39  
Adding the Date ...................204  
AdobeRGB ...........................167  
AE Lock ................................102  
AE Metering ...........................98  
L button ..........................19  
= (Adjustment) ..................106  
= (Autofocus) ....................104  
= button ......................19, 112  
AF point switching dial ...19, 107  
AF200FG ..............................143  
AF360FGZ ...........................143  
AF540FGZ ...........................143  
k(Continuous mode) .....104  
l (Single mode) .............104  
Aperture .................................77  
Aperture Priority Mode c ......89  
C
Cable Switch .......................... 96  
Capture Information .........23, 25  
Card access lamp .................. 17  
Center-weighted ..................... 99  
Cloudy (White Balance) ....... 160  
Color (Digital Filter) .............. 195  
Color Space ......................... 167  
Color Temperature ............... 166  
Continuous mode k ....... 104  
Continuous Shooting ............ 117  
Contrast ............................... 154  
Contrast-Control-Sync  
12  
(Flash) .................................. 150  
Correct exposure ................... 76  
Custom Image ...................... 154  
Custom Setting ..............73, 170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
276  
[A Custom Setting]  
Menu ......................73, 170, 246  
External flash ....................... 143  
Extract Color (Digital Filter) .. 195  
D
F
Date Adjust .............................48  
Date change .........................220  
Daylight (White Balance) ......160  
Daylight-Sync Shooting ..........64  
Delete .............................70, 185  
Delete All Images .................185  
i(Delete) button .............21, 70  
Delete Folder ........................188  
Deleting a Single Image .........70  
Depth of field ..........................77  
Digital Filter ..........................194  
Digital Preview .....................114  
Diopter Adjust .........................52  
Direct Printing .......................207  
Display Language ................224  
Display Style ........................182  
DPOF AUTOPRINT .............213  
DPOF Settings .....................204  
Drive Mode .............................75  
Dust Alert .............................252  
Dust Removal .......................252  
File Format ........................... 158  
File Name ............................. 231  
Filter ..................................... 194  
Filter Effect ........................... 154  
Fireworks ............................... 96  
Fix Focus ............................. 108  
Flash .............................. 60, 135  
Flash (White Balance) .......... 160  
Flash Exposure  
Compensation ...................... 136  
K (Flash pop-up)  
button ............................... 19, 60  
Flash X-sync Speed Mode  
M ........................................... 97  
Fluorescent Light  
(White Balance) ................... 160  
{ button ............19, 21, 75, 171  
{ Menu ......................... 75, 171  
Focus Indicator .................... 110  
Focus Lock ........................... 108  
Focus Mode ......................... 104  
Focus mode lever .................. 19  
Focus point .......................... 107  
Focusing .............................. 104  
Folder Name ........................ 230  
Format .................................. 218  
Four-way controller  
E
Error Message ......................261  
EV Compensation ................100  
m (EV Compensation)  
button .............................19, 100  
Expand Dynamic Range ........79  
Exposure ................................76  
Exposure Bracket .................129  
] (Exposure Bracket)  
(2345) ........................ 19, 21  
Front e-dial ............................. 18  
G
button .............................19, 129  
Exposure Bracket button ......129  
Exposure metering timer ......130  
Exposure Mode ......................80  
Exposure Warning ......88, 90, 94  
Extended Bracket .................131  
Green button .......................... 18  
Green mode B ..................... 83  
Guide display .................22, 225  
12  
H
HDR (Digital Filter) ............... 196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
277  
High-ISO Noise Reduction .....80  
High-Speed Flash Sync  
3 button ............. 19, 21, 30  
Menu Operation ..................... 30  
Meter Operating Time ............ 99  
Metering mode lever ........ 19, 98  
\(Manual focus) .............. 110  
Mirror Up ......................128, 255  
Mode dial ......................... 19, 32  
Monitor ................................... 22  
Multi-exposure ..................... 103  
Multiple Flashes ................... 149  
Multi-segment ........................ 98  
Mode ....................................145  
Histogram .......................26, 182  
Hue .......................................154  
Hyper-manual Mode a ..........93  
Hyper-program Mode e ........84  
I
Illustration (Digital Filter) ......195  
Image Comparison ...............178  
Image Tone ..........................154  
M button ........19, 21, 23, 68  
Initial Settings .................45, 244  
Input Focal Length .................67  
Instant Review ......................227  
Interval Shooting ..................120  
ISO sensitivity ........................78  
N
Night Scene (Bulb Mode) ....... 96  
Nine-Image Display .............. 175  
Noise Reduction ..................... 80  
NTSC ................................... 233  
O
J
4 button ........................ 19, 21  
Optical Preview .................... 115  
Optional Accessories ........... 256  
JPEG Quality ..................42, 157  
JPEG Recorded  
Pixels ..............................42, 156  
P
L
e (Hyper-program) Mode ...... 84  
PAL ...................................... 233  
PictBridge ............................. 207  
Pixel Mapping ...................... 235  
Pixels ................................... 156  
Playback ..........................25, 68  
Q (Playback)  
button ......................... 19, 21, 68  
Playback display .................. 184  
[Q Playback] Menu .... 170, 245  
Playback time ......................... 38  
Power ..................................... 44  
Press fully .............................. 57  
Press halfway ......................... 57  
Preview | ............................ 114  
Preview Method ................... 113  
Print All Images .................... 212  
Language Setting ...................45  
LCD Color Tuning ................226  
LCD panel ..............................29  
Lens ...............................50, 249  
Lens unlock button ...........18, 51  
Live View ......................114, 228  
Lock Exposure .....................110  
M
a(Hyper-manual) Mode ........93  
Main switch ................18, 21, 44  
Manual Exposure Mode a .....93  
Manual focus \ .................110  
Manual White Balance .........163  
Matte Field ...........................111  
Memory ................................236  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
278  
Print Service .........................204  
Print Single Image ................210  
Printer connection ................209  
Program Line ..........................82  
Program Mode e ...................84  
Protect ..................................189  
Z (Protect) button .......21, 189  
P-TTL (Flash) .......................148  
P-TTL Auto (Flash) ...............144  
Shade (White Balance) ........ 160  
Shake Reduction .................... 65  
Shake Reduction switch ... 19, 65  
Sharpness ............................ 154  
Shutter & Aperture Priority Mode  
L ........................................ 91  
Shutter Priority Mode b ........ 87  
Shutter release button  
................................... 18, 21, 57  
Shutter Speed ........................ 76  
Single mode l ................ 104  
Slideshow ..................... 179, 181  
Slim (Digital Filter) ................ 196  
Slow Shutter Speed NR ......... 80  
Slow-speed sync ............60, 139  
Soft (Digital Filter) ................ 195  
Spot Metering ......................... 99  
sRGB ................................... 167  
Strap ...................................... 34  
Superimpose AF Area .... 28, 107  
K (Sensitivity Priority)  
Q
Quality Level ..................42, 157  
R
RAW .....................................158  
| button ............19, 158, 159  
RAW Display ........................197  
RAW file format ....................158  
RAW+ ...................................158  
Rear e-dial ..............................19  
[A Rec. Mode] Menu .....72, 244  
Recordable image no. ............38  
Recorded Pixels .............42, 156  
Red-eye reduction ..........64, 148  
Remote Control ....................125  
Reset ............................237, 244  
Rotate ...................................172  
Mode ...................................... 85  
T
L (Shutter & Aperture Priority)  
Mode ...................................... 91  
Text Size .............................. 225  
Toning .................................. 154  
Trailing curtain sync  
S
Saturation .............................154  
SD Memory Card ...................40  
Select battery .......................234  
Select&Delete ......................186  
Select&Edit ...........................198  
Self-timer ..............................122  
Sensitivity ...............................78  
Sensitivity Priority Mode  
K ..........................................85  
Sensor Cleaning ...................252  
Sepia (Digital Filter) ..............195  
[R Set-up] Menu ..........216, 245  
............................... 60, 140, 148  
Tungsten Light  
(White Balance) ................... 160  
TV ........................................ 191  
b (Shutter Priority) mode ..... 87  
U
12  
USB cable ............................ 207  
USB Connection .................. 208  
A Mode ........................... 133  
Using aperture ring .............. 251  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
279  
V
Video cable ..........................191  
Video Output Format ............233  
Viewfinder ........................27, 52  
Vignetting .............................274  
W
White Balance ......................160  
Wireless Mode (Flash) .........145  
World Time ...........................221  
X
M (Flash X-sync Speed)  
mode ......................................97  
X-sync socket .......................151  
Z
Zoom Display .......................173  
Zoom Lens .............................59  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
280  
WARRANTY POLICY  
All PENTAX cameras purchased through authorized bona fide  
photographic distribution channels are guaranteed against defects of  
material or workmanship for a period of twelve months from date of  
purchase. Service will be rendered, and defective parts will be replaced  
without cost to you within that period, provided the equipment does not  
show evidence of impact, sand or liquid damage, mishandling, tampering,  
battery or chemical corrosion, operation contrary to operating instructions,  
or modification by an unauthorized repair shop. The manufacturer or its  
authorized representatives shall not be liable for any repair or alterations  
except those made with its written consent and shall not be liable for  
damages from delay or loss of use or from other indirect or consequential  
damages of any kind, whether caused by defective material or  
workmanship or otherwise; and it is expressly agreed that the liability of  
the manufacturer or its representatives under all guarantees or warranties,  
whether expressed or implied, is strictly limited to the replacement of parts  
as hereinbefore provided. No refunds will be made on repairs by non-  
authorized PENTAX service facilities.  
Procedure During 12-month Warranty Period  
Any PENTAX which proves defective during the 12-month warranty period  
should be returned to the dealer from whom you purchased the equipment  
or to the manufacturer. If there are no representatives of the manufacturer  
in your country, send the equipment to the manufacturer, with postage  
prepaid. In this case, it will take a considerable length of time before the  
equipment can be returned to you owing to the complicated customs  
procedures required. If the equipment is covered by warranty, repairs will  
be made and parts replaced free of charge, and the equipment will be  
returned to you upon completion of servicing. If the equipment is not  
covered by warranty, regular charges of the manufacturer or of its  
representatives will apply. Shipping charges are to be borne by the owner.  
If your PENTAX was purchased outside of the country where you wish to  
have it serviced during the warranty period, regular handling and servicing  
fees may be charged by the manufacturer’s representatives in that  
country. Notwithstanding this, your PENTAX returned to the manufacturer  
will be serviced free of charge according to this procedure and warranty  
policy. In any case, however, shipping charges and customs clearance  
fees to be borne by the sender. To prove the date of your purchase when  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
281  
required, please keep the receipt or bills covering the purchase of your  
equipment for at least a year. Before sending your equipment for servicing,  
please make sure that you are sending it to the manufacturer’s authorized  
representatives or their approved repair shops, unless you are sending it  
directly to the manufacturer. Always obtain a quotation for the service  
charge, and only after you accept the quoted service charge, instruct the  
service station to proceed with the servicing.  
• This warranty policy does not affect the customer’s statutory  
rights.  
• The local warranty policies available from PENTAX distributors in  
some countries can supersede this warranty policy. Therefore, we  
recommend that you review the warranty card supplied with your  
product at the time of purchase, or contact the PENTAX distributor  
in your country for more information and to receive a copy of the  
warranty policy.  
12  
The CE Mark is a Directive conformity mark of the European  
Union.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
282  
For customers in USA  
STATEMENT OF FCC COMPLIANCE  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject  
to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful  
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired operation.  
Changes or modifications not approved by the party responsible for  
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a  
Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against  
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment  
generates, uses and can radiate frequency energy and, if not installed and  
used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference  
to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference  
will not occur in a particular installation.  
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television  
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on,  
the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of  
the following measures:  
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to  
which the receiver is connected.  
* Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
For customers in Canada  
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.  
Pour les utilisateurs au Canada  
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003  
du Canada.  
FOR CALIFORNIA, U.S.A. ONLY  
Perchlorate Material-special handling may apply.  
The lithium battery used in this camera contains perchlorate material,  
which may require special handling.  
12  
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Declaration of Conformity  
According to 47CFR, Parts 2 and 15 for  
Class B Personal Computers and Peripherals  
We:  
PENTAX Imaging Company  
A Division of PENTAX of America, Inc.  
th  
Located at:  
600 12 Street, Suite 300  
Golden, Colorado 80401 U.S.A.  
Phone: 303-799-8000 FAX: 303-790-1131  
Declare under sole responsibility that the product identified herein  
complies with 47CFR Parts 2 and 15 of the FCC rules as a Class B digital  
device. Each product marketed is identical to the representative unit tested  
and found to be compliant with the standards. Records maintained  
continue to reflect the equipment being produced can be expected to be  
within the variation accepted, due to quantity production and testing on the  
statistical basis as required by 47CFR §2.909. Operation is subject to the  
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful  
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired operation. The above  
named party is responsible for ensuring that the equipment complies with  
the standards of 47CFR §15.101 to §15.109.  
Product Name: PENTAX Digital Still Camera  
Model Number: u  
Contact person: Customer Service Manager  
Date and Place: February, 2008, Colorado  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Information on disposal for users  
1. In the European Union  
If your product is marked with this symbol, it means that used  
electrical/electronic products should not be mixed with general  
household waste. There exists a separate collection system for  
these products.  
Used electric/electronic equipment must be treated separately  
and in accordance with legislation that requires proper  
treatment, recovery and recycling of these products.  
Following the implementation by member states, private  
households within the EU states may return their used  
electrical/electronic equipment to designated collection  
facilities free of charge*. In some countries your local retailer  
may also take back your old product free of charge if you  
purchase a similar new one.  
*Please contact your local authority for further details.  
By disposing of this product correctly you will help ensure that  
the waste undergoes the necessary treatment, recovery and  
recycling and thus prevent potential negative effects on the  
environment and human health which could otherwise arise  
due to inappropriate waste handling.  
2. In other countries outside the EU  
If you wish to discard this product, please contact your local  
authorities and ask for the correct method of disposal.  
For Switzerland: Used electrical/electronic equipment can be  
returned free of charge to the dealer, even when you don’t  
purchase a new product. Further collection facilities are listed  
on the home page of www.swico.ch or www.sens.ch.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memo  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Paxar Printer TC6039SA User Manual
Philips Bottle Warmer SCF660 User Manual
Philips Electric Toothbrush HX7551 User Manual
Philips Hair Dryer HP 4833 User Manual
Philips Portable DVD Player PET741 37 User Manual
Philips Stereo Amplifier TDA7052A User Manual
Philips TV VCR Combo 14PV182 39 User Manual
Philips Universal Remote RU620 87 User Manual
Pioneer Stereo Receiver SX 1980 User Manual
PYLE Audio Car Satellite TV System PLRD195IF User Manual